20.12.2013 Views

The Syntax of Givenness Ivona Kucerová

The Syntax of Givenness Ivona Kucerová

The Syntax of Givenness Ivona Kucerová

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>The</strong> <strong>Syntax</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Givenness</strong><br />

by<br />

<strong>Ivona</strong> Kučerová<br />

Submitted to the Department <strong>of</strong> Linguistics and Philosophy<br />

in partial fulfillment <strong>of</strong> the requirements for the degree <strong>of</strong><br />

PhD<br />

at the<br />

MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY<br />

June 2007<br />

c○ Massachusetts Institute <strong>of</strong> Technology 2007. All rights reserved.<br />

Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Linguistics and Philosophy<br />

May 25,2007<br />

Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Danny Fox<br />

Associate Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor<br />

Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Sabine Iatridou<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor<br />

Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Alec Marantz<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor<br />

Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

David Pesetsky<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor<br />

Accepted by. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Irene Heim<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics, Chair <strong>of</strong> the Linguistics Program


Abstract<br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>Syntax</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Givenness</strong><br />

by<br />

<strong>Ivona</strong> Kučerová<br />

Submitted to the Department <strong>of</strong> Linguistics and Philosophy<br />

on May 25,2007, in partial fulfillment <strong>of</strong> the<br />

requirements for the degree <strong>of</strong><br />

PhD<br />

<strong>The</strong> goal <strong>of</strong> this thesis is to account for distributional patterns <strong>of</strong> given and new items in<br />

Czech, especially their word order. <strong>The</strong> system proposed here has four basic components:<br />

(i) syntax, (ii) economy, (iii) interpretation, and (iv) reference set computation. <strong>The</strong> approach<br />

belongs to the family <strong>of</strong> interface driven approaches.<br />

<strong>The</strong> syntactic part <strong>of</strong> the thesis introduces a free syntactic movement (G-movement).<br />

<strong>The</strong> movement causes very local reordering <strong>of</strong> given elements with respect to new elements<br />

in the structure. G-movement is licensed only if it creates a syntactic structure which leads<br />

to a semantic interpretation that would not otherwise be available. <strong>The</strong> economy condition<br />

interacts with the way givenness is interpreted. I introduce a recursive operator that adds<br />

a presupposition to given elements. <strong>The</strong> distribution <strong>of</strong> the operator is regulated by the<br />

Maximize presupposition maxim <strong>of</strong> Heim (1991). <strong>The</strong> reference set for purposes <strong>of</strong> this<br />

evaluation is defined as the set <strong>of</strong> derivations that have the same numeration and the same<br />

assertion.<br />

Finally, I argue that the licensing semantic conditions on givenness in Czech are not<br />

identical to the licensing conditions on deaccenting in English. <strong>The</strong> givenness licensing<br />

conditions are stronger in that they require that for an element to be given it must not only<br />

have a salient antecedent but also satisfy an existential presupposition.<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor: Danny Fox<br />

Title: Associate Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor: Sabine Iatridou<br />

Title: Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor: Alec Marantz<br />

Title: Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

<strong>The</strong>sis Supervisor: David Pesetsky<br />

Title: Pr<strong>of</strong>essor <strong>of</strong> Linguistics<br />

2


Acknowledgments<br />

Two things were difficult about writing my thesis: (i) choosing the topic (there were too<br />

many things I would like to write a thesis about) and (ii) choosing an adviser. <strong>The</strong>re were<br />

several people I wanted to have as my adviser. In the end I decided to write my thesis on<br />

four different topics and to have four advisers. <strong>The</strong> first decision turned out to be untenable<br />

and I ended up dropping three <strong>of</strong> the topics. <strong>The</strong> second decision, on the other hand, paid<br />

<strong>of</strong>f; except for typographical issues while trying to typeset the cover page <strong>of</strong> my thesis I<br />

have never regretted it.<br />

Alec, Danny, David and Sabine (in alphabetical order) are more than wonderful scholars.<br />

<strong>The</strong>y have been my mentors and guides without ever telling me what to do. In a sense,<br />

they are coauthors <strong>of</strong> many ideas in my thesis: most <strong>of</strong> the ideas took their shape while<br />

sitting together for hours, playing with puzzles and trying different ways to attack them. I<br />

have really enjoyed the eight months I have spent writing my thesis.<br />

My stay at MIT was <strong>of</strong> course more than my dissertation. It is impossible to thank all the<br />

people I have met here and whom I have learned from. Among my teachers a special place<br />

belongs to Noam Chomsky, Mike Collins, Morris Halle, Irene Heim and Donca Steriade. I<br />

want to thank them here for their time and interest in my work.<br />

Sometimes it is hard to draw a clear line between a friend and a colleague. Many people<br />

were both. Asaf Bachrach, Roni Katzir and Raj Singh became my ‘classmates’ and<br />

provided me with intense underground education and great food. Brooke Cowan, Svea<br />

Heinemann and Sarah Hulsey made sure I would know that life at MIT is more than linguistics.<br />

Special thanks go to Béd’a Jelínek without whom I would have never applied to MIT.<br />

He knows best that there is more I should thank him for.<br />

I want to thank also my former teachers without whom I would have not even thought<br />

about starting a PhD: Vlasta Dvořáková, Jindřich Rosenkranz, Jaroslava Janáčková, Michael<br />

Špirit, Jiří Homoláč and †Alexander Stich (in chronological order).<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is no way I could thank my parents and Roni Katzir without trivializing their<br />

place in my life.<br />

3


Contents<br />

1 To Be Given 6<br />

1.1 G-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12<br />

1.2 Basic word order and Focus projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17<br />

1.3 Verb partitions and their semantic ambiguity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22<br />

1.4 <strong>The</strong> boundedness <strong>of</strong> G-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26<br />

1.5 <strong>The</strong> distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns: G-movement as a last Resort . . . . . . . . . 34<br />

1.6 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40<br />

2 G-movement 41<br />

2.1 <strong>The</strong> target <strong>of</strong> G-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42<br />

2.2 When in the derivation does G-movement apply? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45<br />

2.3 <strong>The</strong> head movement restriction on G-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56<br />

2.4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63<br />

3 Complex Word Order Patterns 64<br />

3.1 Deriving the verb partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65<br />

3.2 Multiple G-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70<br />

3.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84<br />

4 Semantic Interpretation 86<br />

4.1 Where we stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87<br />

4.2 Marking givenness by an operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93<br />

4.2.1 G-movement domains are propositional domains . . . . . . . . . . 94<br />

4.2.2 <strong>The</strong> G-operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98<br />

4.3 <strong>The</strong> evaluation component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109<br />

4.4 <strong>The</strong> G-operator and coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114<br />

4.5 <strong>The</strong> interpretation <strong>of</strong> <strong>Givenness</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120<br />

4.6 <strong>Givenness</strong> versus deaccentuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123<br />

4.7 A note on phonology and its relation to givenness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128<br />

4.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132<br />

A G-movement is A-movement 133<br />

A.1 Condition A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />

A.2 Condition C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136<br />

A.3 <strong>The</strong> Weak Cross-Over Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139<br />

4


A.4 A note on base generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139<br />

A.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141<br />

5


Chapter 1<br />

To Be Given<br />

Consider the Czech sentences in (1). 1,2<br />

(1) a. SVO: Chlapec našel lízátko.<br />

boy.Nom found lollipop.Acc<br />

b. OVS: Lízátko našel chlapec.<br />

lollipop.Acc found boy.Nom<br />

c. SOV: Chlapec lízátko NAŠEL.<br />

boy.Nom lollipop.Acc found<br />

d. OSV: LÍZÁtko chlapec našel.<br />

lollipop.Acc boy.Nom found<br />

<strong>The</strong> sentences in (1) describe a similar situation. In each <strong>of</strong> them the speaker asserts that<br />

there was a time interval in the past such that an event <strong>of</strong> finding took place in that interval.<br />

Furthermore, we learn that the event <strong>of</strong> finding had two participants (a finder and a findee)<br />

and we also learn who these participants were (some boy and a lollipop). <strong>The</strong> sentences in<br />

(1) nevertherless differ in their meaning and in the set <strong>of</strong> contexts in which they are felicitous.<br />

To see this, let’s first concentrate on the first two orders, i.e., the SVO and the OVS<br />

orders. Corresponding English translations <strong>of</strong> the Czech sentences are given in (2). 3<br />

1 Capital letters here and throughout the text stand for a contrastively stressed syllable.<br />

2 <strong>The</strong> four combinations given in (1) are the only combinations that can be used as declarative clauses. <strong>The</strong><br />

remaining permutations, given in (i) and (ii), are grammatical but only as questions. <strong>The</strong> following chapters<br />

will deal with declarative clauses only.<br />

(i)<br />

(ii)<br />

VSO: Našel chlapec lízátko?<br />

found boy.Nom lollipop.Acc<br />

‘Did the boy found the lollipop?’<br />

VOS: Našel lízátko chlapec?<br />

found lollipop.Acc boy.Nom<br />

‘Was it the lollipop what the boy found?’<br />

3 <strong>The</strong> hash sign # stands for an utterance that is not felicitous in the given context. In this particular case,<br />

it stands for an infelicitous translation.<br />

6


(2) a. SVO: Chlapec našel lízátko.<br />

boy.Nom found lollipop.Acc<br />

(i) ‘A boy found a lollipop.’<br />

(ii) ‘<strong>The</strong> boy found a lollipop.’<br />

(iii) ‘<strong>The</strong> boy found the lollipop.’<br />

(iv) #‘A boy found the lollipop.’<br />

b. OVS: Lízátko našel chlapec.<br />

lollipop.Acc found boy.Nom<br />

‘A boy found the lollipop.’<br />

As we can see in (2-a), the SVO order in Czech is compatible with several different interpretations.<br />

<strong>The</strong> very same Czech string can correspond (i) to a situation where neither a boy,<br />

nor a lollipop are given, in the sense that there is no referent determined by the previous<br />

context, i.e., the existence <strong>of</strong> the referent has not been asserted yet; (ii) to a situation where<br />

only a boy has been previously determined by the context; or (iii) to a situation where both<br />

the boy and the lollipop have a unique referent but they have not been introduced by the<br />

previous context. Crucially, however, the SVO order is not felicitous in a situation in which<br />

only the lollipop has been introduced by the previous context, (iv).<br />

To achieve the missing interpretation, i.e., the interpretation in which only the object<br />

has been determined by the previous context, the word order must be OVS, as in (2-b),<br />

translated as ‘A boy found the lollipop.’.<br />

What is the nature <strong>of</strong> the reordering? Notice that in order to capture the intuition about<br />

meaning differences corresponding to different word orders, I used indefinite and definite<br />

articles. Since Czech does not have any overt morphological marking <strong>of</strong> definiteness – with<br />

the exception <strong>of</strong> demonstrative and deictic pronouns – we could understand the different<br />

word orders as a strategy to achieve the same interpretation that English can achieve by<br />

using overt determiners. This would be, however, a simplification. <strong>The</strong> object in the OVS<br />

order does not need to correspond to a definite description. It is enough that it has been<br />

introduced in the previous discourse, as in (3). 4<br />

(3) a. We left some cookies and lollipops in the garden for the kids. Who found a<br />

lollipop?<br />

b. Lízátko našla Maruška a Janička.<br />

lollipop.Acc found Maruška and Janička<br />

‘Little Mary and little Jane found a lollipop.’<br />

4 <strong>The</strong> reordering observed in (2-a) and (2-b) might remind the reader <strong>of</strong> the Mapping Hypothesis <strong>of</strong> Diesing<br />

1992 or <strong>of</strong> a more general discussion <strong>of</strong> specificity as in Enç 1991; van Geenhoven 1998; Farkas 2002, among<br />

many others. One might think that for a DP to become specific (whatever it means) such a DP must move to<br />

(or it must be base-generated in) a certain syntactic position. As we will see shortly, not only referential, but<br />

also predicational or propositional elements can be introduced in a discourse in the same way as the object in<br />

(2-b). I do not know at this point whether there is any connection between specificity and the data discussed<br />

here. In general, I will ignore possible relations between quantification and information structure here.<br />

7


We will see in chapter 4, however, that the correlation with definite articles is not accidental.<br />

I will argue that the purpose <strong>of</strong> both reordering for givenness and definiteness marking<br />

is to maximize presupposition (Heim, 1991). While the two strategies are in principle different,<br />

their realization may sometimes be identical.<br />

I thus argue that the nature <strong>of</strong> the reordering found in (2-b) is indeed to mark that<br />

something has already been introduced in the discourse. An interesting fact to observe<br />

is that even though the SVO order has multiple interpretations, certain interpretations are<br />

excluded and they can be achieved only by reordering. This suggests that the purpose <strong>of</strong><br />

the reordering is to achieve an interpretation that would not be available otherwise. 5<br />

I will argue shortly that this ordering correlates with a requirement that given (old, presupposed)<br />

elements linearly precede elements that are new (asserted, non-presupposed) in<br />

the discourse. While in (2-a) this requirement can be satisfied within the SVO order, in<br />

case <strong>of</strong> the (2-b) examples, reordering is needed.<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (1-c) and (1-d), repeated below as (4-a) and (4-b), are rather different.<br />

While in the examples in (2-a) and (2-b) at least one participant has not been introduced in<br />

the discourse yet, the examples in (4-a) and (4-b) contain only previously introduced participants.<br />

In other words, the utterances in (2-a) and (2-b) correspond to an assertion that<br />

combines something already presupposed with something that has not been presupposed<br />

yet. In contrast, the utterance in (1-c)–(1-d) operates on an already asserted proposition.<br />

<strong>The</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> the SOV order in (4-a) can be either verification <strong>of</strong> the true value <strong>of</strong> the<br />

proposition, or correction <strong>of</strong> a part <strong>of</strong> the proposition by excluding other alternatives. 6<br />

Similarly, the example in (4-b) corresponds to an utterance about already introduced participants<br />

and it comments on their relation (contrastive topic or topic).<br />

(4) a. SOV: <strong>The</strong> boy did find the lollipop. (He did not steal it.)<br />

b. OSV: As for the lollipop, the boy found it (but as for the chocolate, he got it<br />

from his mother).<br />

<strong>The</strong> study presented here concerns mainly the type <strong>of</strong> examples given in (2). Before I<br />

undertake a closer investigation <strong>of</strong> these cases I want to provide the reader with some further<br />

observations that will help to clarify why it is useful to treat the examples in (2) as separate<br />

from the examples in (4). We have already seen that the type <strong>of</strong> reordering witnessed in<br />

(2) may teach us something about the way presupposed and non-presupposed elements are<br />

marked in a language that does not have overt articles. Everything being equal, the English<br />

translations <strong>of</strong> the Czech examples in (2) differ only in the use <strong>of</strong> articles. <strong>The</strong>re are no<br />

other obvious changes in syntax, prosody or morphology. <strong>The</strong> English translations <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Czech examples in (4) are very different in this respect. Both have marked prosody (pitch<br />

5 We will see in this chapter and especially in section 1.2 that SVO is the basic word order in Czech. I will<br />

argue that a basic word order in general allows more flexibility in interpretation than a derived word order.<br />

6 In literature on information structure, this type <strong>of</strong> construction is <strong>of</strong>ten referred to as verum focus, i.e.,<br />

a construction where the speaker verifies or denies that an already presupposed proposition is true, or contrastive<br />

focus or correction, in case the speaker asserts an exclusion <strong>of</strong> an alternative that might have been<br />

introduced by the previous context.<br />

8


accent on the auxiliary did in (4-a) and pitch accent on the lollipop in (4-b), both followed<br />

by optional deaccenting). Furthermore, the example in (4-a) contains additional morphological<br />

material (did) and the example in (4-b) may correspond in English to a cleft, i.e., to<br />

a rather complex structure. I suggest that Czech is like English in that the processes that<br />

lead to the reordering in Czech (2-b) are <strong>of</strong> a very different nature than the processes that<br />

lead to the reorderings witnessed in Czech (4). If we want to understand these processes<br />

we should study them separately. 7<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is another parallel between Czech and English worth mentioning. It concerns<br />

differences between the prosodic properties <strong>of</strong> (2) and (4). As in English, the Czech intonation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the examples in (2) is neutral. Furthermore, there are no relevant differences<br />

between (1-a) and (1-b). Compare figure 1-1 and 1-2. In contrast, the intonation <strong>of</strong> (4) is<br />

marked. In (4-a), the verb našel ‘found’ is distinct in its duration and intensity. As we can<br />

see in figure 1-3, the duration <strong>of</strong> the bisyllabic verb is roughly doubled in comparison with<br />

the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the same word in other syntactic environments. In (4-b), the sentence<br />

initial object lízátko ‘lollipop’ is pronounced with a higher tone and the sequence is followed<br />

by deaccenting and an optional intonational break, as in figure 1-4.<br />

500<br />

400<br />

300<br />

200<br />

Pitch (Hz)<br />

100<br />

0<br />

chlapec nasel lizatko<br />

0 2.83288<br />

Time (s)<br />

Figure 1-1: SVO order<br />

7 Reordering processes, superficially similar to those seen in (2) and (4), are <strong>of</strong>ten referred to as scrambling.<br />

<strong>The</strong> term originated in Ross 1967 as a term for stylistic reordering. In the more recent literature,<br />

scrambling may refer to A-movement, A-bar movement or base generation (for example, Williams 1984;<br />

Saito 1989; Webelhuth 1989; Grewendorf and Sternfeld 1990; Mahajan 1990; Lasnik and Saito 1992; Saito<br />

1992; Corver and van Riemsdijk 1994; Miyagawa 1997; Bošković and Takahashi 1998; Bailyn 2001; Karimi<br />

2003; Sabel and Saito 2005). I will avoid the term scrambling here in order to minimize possible confusion<br />

that might come from various interpretations the term has been assigned in the literature.<br />

9


Pitch (Hz)<br />

500<br />

400<br />

300<br />

200<br />

100<br />

0<br />

lizatko nasel chlapec<br />

0 3.32218<br />

Time (s)<br />

Figure 1-2: OVS order<br />

Before we get to the actual proposal there is another empirical observation to be established.<br />

Notice that in the examples in (2) the verb occupies the second position. In contrast,<br />

in the examples in (4) the verb linearly follows the arguments. 8 As we will see shortly, two<br />

factors turn out to be crucial for understanding Czech word order variations: the relative<br />

position <strong>of</strong> arguments and the relative position <strong>of</strong> the verb with respect to the arguments.<br />

In the rest <strong>of</strong> this chapter and in the following chapters I will closely investigate the<br />

nature <strong>of</strong> the reordering witnessed in (2). I will argue that this type <strong>of</strong> reordering is derived<br />

by short A-movement that is sometimes parasitic on verb head movement. I will call this<br />

movement G-Movement. This movement happens, I will claim, only in order to derive a<br />

semantic interpretation that would not be available otherwise. As such this kind <strong>of</strong> movement<br />

is driven by interpretation requirements and is restricted by economy.<br />

<strong>The</strong> goal <strong>of</strong> section 1.1 is to introduce the basics <strong>of</strong> a system that can account for the<br />

Czech word order data observed in (2). I will present the proposal in stages.<br />

<strong>The</strong> first version <strong>of</strong> the system, introduced in this section, is designed to account for<br />

the order <strong>of</strong> the arguments and the position <strong>of</strong> the verb. Further refinements will be introduced<br />

in the following chapters. In the next section, section 1.2, I will address the question<br />

<strong>of</strong> how come multiple interpretations are available (only) for basic word orders, such as<br />

SVO. In particular, I will argue that the ambiguity follows from G-movement being a last<br />

resort operation. Section 1.3 will more closely investigate the fact that the verb intervenes<br />

between the two arguments, in contrast to other types <strong>of</strong> reorderings, such as questions<br />

8 To make the picture complete, in questions the verb precedes the arguments.<br />

10


Pitch (Hz)<br />

500<br />

400<br />

300<br />

200<br />

100<br />

0<br />

chlapec lizatko nasel<br />

0 3.39374<br />

Time (s)<br />

Figure 1-3: SOV order<br />

500<br />

400<br />

300<br />

200<br />

Pitch (Hz)<br />

100<br />

0<br />

lizatko chlapec nasel<br />

0 3.18576<br />

Time (s)<br />

Figure 1-4: OSV order<br />

11


and contrastive foci readings. I will argue that even though G-movement is independently<br />

restricted by syntax like any other type <strong>of</strong> movement, it differs from other types <strong>of</strong> movement<br />

in that it is parasitic on head movement. <strong>The</strong> emergence <strong>of</strong> verb second will be seen<br />

as a consequence <strong>of</strong> this restriction. In section 1.4 I will explore further consequences <strong>of</strong><br />

this restriction, namely, differences in locality restrictions on G-movement dependent on<br />

head movement properties <strong>of</strong> the relevant head. In the last section <strong>of</strong> this chapter, 1.5, I<br />

will provide independent evidence for the proposed machinery. I will argue based on the<br />

distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns that G-movement is a last resort operation. As such it takes place<br />

only if the relevant interpretation would not otherwise be available.<br />

1.1 G-movement<br />

<strong>The</strong> idea that word order in a language such as Czech is sensitive to the discourse in the<br />

sense that parts <strong>of</strong> a clause that are old (given, in the background etc.) linearly precede the<br />

elements that are new in the discourse has been investigated in Czech linguistics for a long<br />

time. 9<br />

<strong>The</strong> questions that have not, to my knowledge, been successfully addressed yet are (i)<br />

how exactly is the linear partition (i.e., given ≻ new) derived, and (ii) how is the word order<br />

within the old and the new part determined.<br />

Consider the example in (5). This sentence could be an answer to ‘What did Petr do<br />

yesterday with his car?’ <strong>The</strong> || sign corresponds to the partition between given and new.<br />

Now compare (5) and (6). <strong>The</strong> example in (6) shows the basic word order and as such it is<br />

a suitable answer to the question ‘What happened?’. 10 As we can see schematized in (7),<br />

the two word orders differ quite radically.<br />

(5) Petr auto včera || řídil rychle.<br />

Petr.Nom car.Acc yesterday drove fast<br />

‘Yesterday Petr drove his car fast.’<br />

←− S O Adv1 V Adv2<br />

9 <strong>The</strong> relevance <strong>of</strong> the discourse for word order has already been observed by traditional grammarians (for<br />

example, Gebauer 1900). In the pre-modern tradition, the observation was stated in terms <strong>of</strong> psychological<br />

and structural subjects. To my knowledge, the intuition about the broader relevance <strong>of</strong> the discourse was<br />

for the first time formalized in a more systematic way by Vilém Mathesius in Mathesius [1929] 1983 and<br />

Mathesius 1939 (the first version <strong>of</strong> the paper was presented in Prague in 1908). In order to describe the<br />

relation between word order and the discourse, Mathesius introduced the term aktuální členění. This term is<br />

usually translated as topic focus articulation. This is not an exact translation though. <strong>The</strong> literal translation<br />

would be something like structuring [<strong>of</strong> the sentence] dependent on the current context and referred to theme<br />

versus rheme distinction. Authors that further developed the notion <strong>of</strong> word order dependence on the current<br />

context include, for example, Daneš 1954, 1957, 1974; Novák 1959; ; Dokulil and Daneš 1958; Šmilauer<br />

1960; Adamec 1962; Firbas 1964; Hausenblas 1964; Sgall 1967; Benešová 1968; Hajičová 1973, 1974; Sgall<br />

et al. 1980, 1986; Hajičová et al. 1998, among many others. <strong>The</strong>re is no way I can acknowledge in this study<br />

all <strong>of</strong> the empirical observations, generalizations and linguistic insight that is present in the previous work on<br />

aktuální členění in Czech.<br />

10 I will provide diagnostics for determining basic word order in 1.2.<br />

12


(6) Petr řídil včera rychle auto.<br />

Petr.Nom drove yesterday fast car.Acc<br />

‘Yesterday Petr drove fast his car.’<br />

←− S V Adv1 Adv2 O<br />

(7) Petr drove yesterday fast car −→ Petr car yesterday || drove fast<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are two facts to be noticed. (i) <strong>The</strong> given elements in (5) precede the new elements.<br />

(ii) While the relative order <strong>of</strong> the new items in (5) is preserved relative to (6), the relative<br />

order <strong>of</strong> the given items has changed. <strong>The</strong> changes are highlighted in (8) and (9).<br />

(8) Word order <strong>of</strong> the given elements:<br />

a. Basic: Petr drove yesterday fast car<br />

b. Derived: Petr car yesterday || drove fast<br />

(9) Word order <strong>of</strong> the new elements:<br />

a. Basic: Petr drove yesterday fast car<br />

b. Derived: Petr car yesterday || drove fast<br />

As we will see throughout the coming sections and chapters, this is a typical pattern<br />

that arises in other places as well: <strong>The</strong> relative order <strong>of</strong> given items with respect to the<br />

basic word order may undergo various permutations, while the relative order <strong>of</strong> new items<br />

usually stays unchanged. <strong>The</strong> only exception is in fact a new finite verb, as we will see<br />

shortly. In all other cases, new items do not change their relative order at all. As we will<br />

see later in this section, this observation is important and it will become crucial for the<br />

way we are going to account for different Czech word order patterns. As we will see, reorderings<br />

happen in a principled way and they can be directly predicted from the relevant<br />

syntactic structure.<br />

Another important fact is that the relative order <strong>of</strong> given items only sometimes changes.<br />

As we can see in (8), the relative order <strong>of</strong> the subject Petr with respect to ‘car’ and ‘yesterday’<br />

does not change. In contrast, the order <strong>of</strong> the object auto ‘car’ and the adverbial včera<br />

‘yesterday’ is reversed. For example, in the same sentence without the adverb ‘yesterday’,<br />

the relative word order <strong>of</strong> the given items would be the same, (10).<br />

(10) Petr auto || řídil rychle.<br />

Petr.Nom car.Acc drove fast<br />

‘Petr drove his car fast.’<br />

I propose that these word order facts suggest that only given elements move for information<br />

structure purposes. This is a simplistic picture because new finite verbs sometimes move<br />

as well but let’s stay with the simple generalization for the sake <strong>of</strong> building the proposal in<br />

stages.<br />

13


Notice that there is no optionality in the word order <strong>of</strong> given elements in a sentence<br />

with a particular meaning. Thus, we need to have a restrictive syntactic system that would<br />

account for the word order. I argue that given elements undergo a special kind <strong>of</strong> movement<br />

that I will call G-movement. <strong>The</strong> rules governing G-movement are given in (11). Further<br />

restrictions on G-movement are stated in (12).<br />

(11) G-Movement [version 1]<br />

G-movement must take place<br />

a. iff α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a non-G element,<br />

b. unless the movement is independently blocked.<br />

(12) Restrictions on G-movement:<br />

G-movement is restricted as follows:<br />

a. α G moves to the closest position X, such that no non-G element asymmetrically<br />

c-commands α G .<br />

b. If α is XP, then α moves to an XP position.<br />

c. If α is a head, then α moves to an X 0 position.<br />

(13) Closeness: (after Rizzi (1990))<br />

X is the closest to Y only if there is no Z such that Z c-commands Y and does not<br />

c-command X.<br />

Following Reinhart 1997, 2006; Fox 1995, 2000, I argue that G-movement is a syntactic<br />

operation that takes place only if it affects one or both <strong>of</strong> the interfaces. In particular, I<br />

argue that G-movement must have semantic import. In other words, the grammar I argue<br />

for is restricted by economy in that it allows only syntactic operations that lead to a<br />

distinct semantic interpretation. Notice that if there is no non-G element asymmetrically<br />

c-commanding α G the closest position that satisfies the requirement on G-movement is the<br />

position <strong>of</strong> α G itself. Thus, if there is no structurally higher new element, α G does not<br />

move.<br />

<strong>The</strong> definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement implies that an element does not enter the computation<br />

marked as given but it is only the result <strong>of</strong> the computation that the element is interpreted as<br />

such. As we will see in 1.5, this property is crucially connected to the fact that G-movement<br />

is a last resort operation.<br />

Furthermore, (11) crucially relies on the notion <strong>of</strong> asymmetrical c-command (Kayne,<br />

1994) 11 and it does not distinguish heads from phrases, in the sense that both heads and<br />

11 <strong>The</strong> relevant definitions are given below:<br />

(i) X asymmetrically c-commands Y iff X c-commands Y and Y does not c-command X. (Kayne, 1994,<br />

p. 4, (2))<br />

(ii)<br />

X c-commands Y iff X and Y are categories and X excludes Y and every category that dominates X<br />

dominates Y. (Kayne, 1994, p. 16, (3))<br />

(iii) In the sense <strong>of</strong> Chomsky 1986, p. 9: X excludes Y if no segment <strong>of</strong> X dominates Y. (Kayne, 1994, p.<br />

133, ftn.1)<br />

14


phrases are required to undergo G-movement. 12 Consider the trees in (14).<br />

Taking into account that Czech is an SVO language, there are two basic cases to consider.<br />

Either (i) α G is a head and β (a non-G element) is a phrase, as in (14-a); or (ii) α G is<br />

a phrase and β is a head, as in (14-b).<br />

(14) a.<br />

βP α G<br />

b.<br />

β<br />

α G P<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> (14-a), the definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement requires the head α G to move above<br />

the phrase, resulting in (15). I leave open for now what exactly the landing site <strong>of</strong> such a<br />

movement is. I will address this question in section 2.3.<br />

(15)<br />

α G<br />

βP t αG<br />

An example <strong>of</strong> such movement is found in unergatives. In Czech, in the basic word<br />

order an unergative subject precedes an unergative verb, as in (16). If the verb is given and<br />

the subject is new, the word order is reversed, as in (17). 13<br />

(16) a. What happened?<br />

b. Marie tancovala.<br />

Marie danced<br />

(17) a. Who danced?<br />

b. Tancovala || Marie.<br />

danced Marie<br />

‘Marie danced.’<br />

In case <strong>of</strong> (14-b), the definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement requires the phrase α G to move over the<br />

head β, resulting into (18).<br />

(18)<br />

α G P β tαG<br />

A simple case <strong>of</strong> such movement can be found with unaccusatives. In contrast to unergatives,<br />

in the basic word order, an unaccusative subject follows an unaccusative verb, as in<br />

(19). If the verb is new and the subject is given, the word order is reversed, as in (20).<br />

12 <strong>The</strong> proposal predicts that if there were rightward movement, a given element might follow a new element.<br />

Unfortunately, I am not aware <strong>of</strong> any case <strong>of</strong> rightward movement in Czech that would allow to test<br />

this prediction.<br />

13 I simplify the derivation here. In the full derivation, V moves to v, resulting into structure that requires<br />

another instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement. I will go through derivations in more details in the coming chapters. For<br />

now, I leave many details aside.<br />

15


(19) a. What happened?<br />

b. Přijel vlak.<br />

arrived train<br />

‘A train arrived.’<br />

(20) a. What happened to the train?<br />

b. Vlak || přijel.<br />

train arrived<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> train arrived.’<br />

This is basically the story. 14 <strong>The</strong>re are still many questions that need to be addressed –<br />

and I will address them in the coming sections and chapters – but the core <strong>of</strong> the argument<br />

is as simple as this: If a given element α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a non-G<br />

element, α G needs to move. If there is no <strong>of</strong>fending c-command relation, G-movement<br />

does not take place.<br />

Before I approach developing the syntactic system in more detail, I want to shortly address<br />

what I mean by given.<br />

In the literature on information structure it is agreed, at least since Halliday (1967), that<br />

an utterance may be divided into two parts, one <strong>of</strong> which is more established in the discourse<br />

(common ground, context. . . ) than the other. While the terminology and the actual<br />

approaches vary widely (see for example Kruijff-Korbayová and Steedman (2003) for a<br />

recent overview), there is a strong intuition that the two parts are complementary to each<br />

other. Thus, it is a reasonable assumption that a grammar might refer only to one <strong>of</strong> the<br />

parts. <strong>The</strong> question then is which part is relevant.<br />

<strong>The</strong> approach I take here is based on the idea that the part encoded in the grammar is<br />

the given part (on given/new or given/focus scale). For arguments for this type <strong>of</strong> approach<br />

see, for instance, Williams (1997); Schwarzschild (1999); Krifka (2001); Sauerland (2005);<br />

Reinhart (2006).<br />

As to the question <strong>of</strong> how exactly given is defined for now I will adopt Schwarzschild’s<br />

definition <strong>of</strong> givenness, stated in (21). <strong>The</strong> definition is based on the observation that<br />

for element α to be given, which in English roughly corresponds to being deaccented, α<br />

must be entailed by the previous discourse and α must have a salient antecedent. Since<br />

entailment refers to proposition, the definition ensures that entailment can be stated for any<br />

α (not only propositional but also referential and predicational), (21-b).<br />

(21) Definition <strong>of</strong> Given (modified from Schwarzschild 1999, p. 151, (25))<br />

α is interpreted as Given in an utterance U iff there is a salient antecedent A such<br />

that<br />

a. α and A corefer; or<br />

14 <strong>The</strong>re is one crucial piece missing: dependence <strong>of</strong> G-movement on head movement. I will discuss this<br />

property in section 1.3 and 2.3.<br />

16


. A entails (α,U) where (α,U) is an utterance derived by replacing all maximal<br />

constituents <strong>of</strong> U (except for α) by variables existentially quantified over.<br />

Any other element is a non-G element.<br />

<strong>The</strong> definition will be more than sufficient for the discussion <strong>of</strong> the syntax <strong>of</strong> givenness in<br />

chapters 1–3. We will see, however, in chapter 4 that the proposed syntactic mechanism<br />

covers only a subset <strong>of</strong> the relevant cases. For the rest <strong>of</strong> the Czech empirical pattern we<br />

will need to combine the syntactic system with a semantic one. In chapter 4 we will also<br />

see that the Schwarzschild definition is too weak for the Czech facts. But all this must wait.<br />

Let’s concentrate on the syntax first.<br />

1.2 Basic word order and Focus projection<br />

This section shows that only basic word orders are compatible with multiple interpretations.<br />

In order to account for this fact, I will argue that the lack <strong>of</strong> ambiguity for derived orders<br />

follows from G-movement being a last resort operation. If a structure is such that there<br />

is no new (non-G) element asymmetrically c-commanding given α G , no G-movement is<br />

expected. <strong>The</strong> core idea that I will introduce in this section is that while a structure without<br />

any instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement may be compatible with several interpretations, G-movement<br />

always disambiguates.<br />

So far I have not established how we define the basic word order. I propose, following<br />

Veselovská (1995); Junghanns and Zybatow (1997); Lavine and Freidin (2002); Bailyn<br />

(2003), among others, that the basic word order in Czech is the all-new word order. This<br />

means that the basic word order is an order that can be used as a felicitous answer to the<br />

question What happened?. 15 An example <strong>of</strong> such an order is given in (22). Notice also that<br />

binding, which is sometimes used for determining basic word order, cannot be used as a<br />

diagnostic for Czech. <strong>The</strong> reason is that Slavic languages have A-movement scrambling<br />

that can change the basic word order and create new binding configurations. I will comment<br />

on binding properties <strong>of</strong> G-movement in appendix A.<br />

(22) Basic word order:<br />

A: What happened at the party?<br />

B 1 : [Marie dala Pavlovi facku] New .<br />

Marie.Nom gave Pavel.Dat slap.Acc<br />

B 2 : #Marie dala facku Pavlovi.<br />

Marie.Nom gave slap.Acc Pavel.Dat<br />

B 3 : #Pavlovi dala Marie facku.<br />

Pavel.Dat gave Marie.Nom slap.Acc<br />

B 4 : #Facku dala Marie Pavlovi.<br />

slap.Acc gave Marie.Nom Pavel.Dat<br />

‘Marie slapped Pavel. [literary: Marie gave Pavel a slap.]’<br />

15 <strong>The</strong> cited authors address only Slavic languages, more precisely Czech, Ukrainian, and Russian.<br />

17


It has also been observed that in basic word order various constituents may be understood<br />

as new. <strong>The</strong> only condition for an SVO language like Czech is that a new constituent be<br />

aligned to the right edge <strong>of</strong> a clause. We can test this property by using wh-questions<br />

targeting different constituents, as seen in (23).<br />

18


(23) What can be understood as new?<br />

a. (i) What did Marie give to Pavel?<br />

(ii) Marie dala Pavlovi [facku] New ←− slap<br />

b. (i) What did Marie give to whom?<br />

(ii) Marie dala [Pavlovi facku] New ←− Pavel a slap<br />

c. (i) What did Marie do?<br />

(ii) Marie [dala Pavlovi facku] New ←− gave Pavel a slap<br />

d. (i) What happened?<br />

(ii) [Marie dala Pavlovi facku] New ←− Marie gave Pavel a slap<br />

In contrast, if an utterance contains any deviance from the basic order, then such an utterance<br />

is infelicitous in an all-new context. It means that if any reordering takes place,<br />

at least one constituent must be α G , i.e., introduced in the previous discourse. In other<br />

words, any reordering limits the number <strong>of</strong> structural positions in which we can identify<br />

the partition between given and new. For example, in a derived word order, as in (24), there<br />

is only one felicitous interpretation <strong>of</strong> the information structure. More precisely, only the<br />

rightmost constituent can be interpreted as new (non-G). In this particular case, it is the<br />

indirect object Pavel. Thus, in (24) there is only one possible partition between given and<br />

new, in contrast to (22) that is compatible with several partitions, as schematized in (25).<br />

(24) Focus Projection within a derived word order:<br />

a. Marie dala facku [Pavlovi] New ←− S V DO || IO t DO<br />

b. #Marie dala [facku Pavlovi] New<br />

c. #Marie [dala facku Pavlovi] New<br />

d. #[Marie dala facku Pavlovi] New<br />

(25) a. Marie dala facku || Pavlovi.<br />

b. (||) Marie (||) dala (||) Pavlovi (||) facku.<br />

What we can learn from the observed pattern is that in basic word order there is a relative<br />

freedom in what parts <strong>of</strong> the utterance can be interpreted as new and what parts can be interpreted<br />

as given. As I have already anticipated in the previous discussion <strong>of</strong> G-movement,<br />

this pattern can be described in the following manner: whatever is interpreted as given cannot<br />

be linearly preceded by anything interpreted as new.<br />

Let’s now turn to the question <strong>of</strong> how exactly the multiple partition effect follows from<br />

our system. To see that, we will look at a very simple case: a transitive clause that has no<br />

modifiers, only a subject, a verb, and an object. Consider first the case where the subject is<br />

the only given element. As we already know, the resulting word order is SVO, as seen in<br />

(26) and (27). 16<br />

(26) a. Subject-G verb Object ←−<br />

b. #Object verb Subject-G<br />

16 I use here examples with potom ‘then, afterward’ instead <strong>of</strong> a wh-question. <strong>The</strong> reason is that potom<br />

creates a natural context where only the subject is presupposed/given. For reasons that are not clear to me, it<br />

is difficult to obtain the same pragmatic effect with a wh-question.<br />

19


c. #Subject-G Object verb<br />

d. . . .<br />

(27) What did Mary do afterward?<br />

a. (Potom) Maruška || zavolala nějakého chlapce ze sousedství.<br />

afterward Mary.Nom called some boy.Acc from neighborhood<br />

b. #(Potom) Maruška nějakého chlapce ze sousedství zavolala<br />

afterward Mary.Nom some boy.Acc from neighborhood called<br />

‘Afterward Mary called some boy from her neighborhood.’<br />

I have proposed in 1.1 that G-movement is a last resort operation. We predict that G-<br />

movement takes place only if there is a non-G element asymmetrically c-commanding the<br />

given subject. Since there is no such element, in this particular case there is no G-movement<br />

taking place. A corresponding tree representation is given in (28).<br />

20


(28) Derivation <strong>of</strong> [Subject]-G verb Object<br />

vP<br />

Subject G<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

Object<br />

Let’s now consider the same sentence but with both the subject and the verb given. An<br />

example is given in (29) and (30).<br />

(29) a. Subject-G verb-G Object ←−<br />

b. #Object verb-G Subject-G<br />

c. #Subject-G Object-G verb<br />

d. . . .<br />

(30) Whom did Mary call afterward?<br />

a. Potom Maruška zavolala || nějakého chlapce ze sousedství.<br />

then Mary.Nom called some boy.Acc from neighborhoud<br />

b. #Potom Maruška nějakého chlapce ze sousedství zavolala<br />

then Mary.Nom some boy.Acc from neighborhoud called<br />

‘<strong>The</strong>n Mary called some boy from her neighborhoud.’<br />

Since neither the subject nor the verb is asymmetrically c-commanded by anything new, it<br />

follows that the derivation should be the same as in (28). <strong>The</strong> reason is that in neither (26)<br />

nor (29) does G-movement take place. <strong>The</strong> representation I argue for is given in (31).<br />

21


(31) Derivation <strong>of</strong> [Subject]-G verb-G Object<br />

vP<br />

Subject G<br />

vP<br />

v-G<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

Object<br />

<strong>The</strong> logic that arises is the following: if a structure is monotonous in the sense that there is<br />

no point where a new element would asymmetrically c-command a given element, syntax<br />

does not have any tool to mark what part exactly is given and what part exactly is new. In<br />

contrast, if there is any deviance from the basic word order, the partition between given<br />

and new is syntactically realized. Thus, the interpretation <strong>of</strong> the utterance is restricted by<br />

syntactic tools. I will argue in chapter 4 that if there is no G-movement, the partition is<br />

established by the semantic component.<br />

I argue that any basic word order sentence – if presented out <strong>of</strong> the blue – is ambiguous<br />

with respect to its information structure. Since there is no syntactic marking <strong>of</strong> the partition<br />

between given and new within basic word order determining the partition is left entirely to<br />

the semantic interface. I argue that this follows from the fact that in a neutral word order<br />

sentence there is no G-movement taking place. Thus the syntactic output <strong>of</strong> such a sentence<br />

is identical no matter how many semantic interpretations <strong>of</strong> the sentence are available.<br />

This conclusion is supported by the fact that there is no difference in prosody between<br />

(27-a) and (30-a). If we assume that phonology reads prosody directly <strong>of</strong>f the syntactic<br />

structure (see, for example, Bresnan 1972; Truckenbrodt 1995; Wagner 2005; Büring 2006,<br />

among many others) this is an unsurprising result. <strong>The</strong>refore, it is only the semantic component<br />

that may interpret such a clause in different ways depending on the actual context.<br />

For syntax and the syntax-phonology interface there is only one structure to be considered.<br />

Crucially, this behavior is a consequence <strong>of</strong> G-movement being a last resort operation. If G-<br />

movement had to take place whenever there was something potentially given, the semantic<br />

(but also word order and prosodic) ambiguity <strong>of</strong> the basic word order would be unexpected.<br />

In this section, we have seen that there is a close connection between the last resort<br />

character <strong>of</strong> G-movement and the multiple interpretations available for basic word orders.<br />

In the next section we will look at ambiguities that arise within derived orders. I will argue<br />

that this type <strong>of</strong> ambiguity follows from G-movement being dependent on head movement.<br />

1.3 Verb partitions and their semantic ambiguity<br />

In Czech the partition between given and new is <strong>of</strong>ten manifested by a finite verb. <strong>The</strong><br />

fact that Czech verbs usually appear between the given and the new part has already been<br />

observed by Vilém Mathesius (Mathesius, [1929] 1983, 1939). In the following Czech<br />

22


functionalist tradition there has been prevailing disagreement on whether the inflected verbal<br />

form can be characterized as given or new (for example, Sgall (1967); Hajičová (1974);<br />

Sgall et al. (1980)) or whether the verb forms a special category which is neither given nor<br />

new (for example, Firbas 1964; Svoboda 1984). I will argue that the finite verb is indeed either<br />

given or new. <strong>The</strong> reason why it is so difficult to characterize its information structure<br />

status is that the verb is <strong>of</strong>ten ambiguous between being given and new. More precisely,<br />

the partition between given and new <strong>of</strong>ten either immediately precedes the finite verb or<br />

immediately follows it.<br />

I will argue that this is a side-product <strong>of</strong> an independent property <strong>of</strong> G-movement. In<br />

particular, I will argue that G-movement is parasitic on head movement. <strong>The</strong> idea that<br />

a certain type <strong>of</strong> movement may be dependent on head movement has been already proposed<br />

in other contexts (see, for example, Holmberg 1986 for Object shift and Heycock<br />

and Kroch 1993; Johnson 2002 for coordination) but it is not well understood. I will provide<br />

a possible motivation <strong>of</strong> this restriction on G-movement in section 2.3. In this section<br />

I will show that we can find two possible motivations for head movement in connection<br />

with G-movement. Either (i) head movement is an independent instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement,<br />

and the verb is given, or (ii) the verb is new and head movement facilitates G-movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> some other element. In both cases head movement is understood as part <strong>of</strong> the narrow<br />

syntax (contrary to Chomsky (2000, 2001, 2004a)).<br />

In the simple cases we have considered so far, the relative word order <strong>of</strong> the new part<br />

was the same as the basic word order. Consider (32).<br />

(32) a. And what about the lollipop?<br />

b. #Lízátko malá holčička našla.←− # O || S V<br />

lollipop.Acc little girl.Nom found<br />

c. Lízátko || našla malá holčička. ←− O || V S<br />

lollipop.Acc found little girl.Nom<br />

‘A little girl found the lollipop.’<br />

Our system as it is set up now predicts that the word order <strong>of</strong> the new elements should not<br />

change, thus, the verb should linearly follow the subject, as in (32-b). This prediction is,<br />

however, incorrect. As we see in (32-c), the verb must precede the subject. I argue that this<br />

is a result <strong>of</strong> a more general restriction on G-movement that has not been discussed yet. A<br />

first approximation <strong>of</strong> the restriction is given in (33). I will discuss the restriction in further<br />

detail in section 2.3.<br />

(33) Head movement restriction on G-movement:<br />

α G can G-move out <strong>of</strong> XP only if X 0 moves out <strong>of</strong> XP as well.<br />

<strong>The</strong> restriction is meant to capture the fact that if α G G-moves, the head in which projection<br />

α G was base generated moves as well. We will see only in section 2.3 how exactly<br />

the head movement restriction is motivated and when it applies. For now, let’s stay with<br />

the following claim: there are two cases in which a head moves because <strong>of</strong> G-movement:<br />

(i) the head itself is given and as such it needs to undergo G-movement; (ii) the head itself<br />

23


is not given but its movement is necessary to facilitate G-movement <strong>of</strong> some other given<br />

element.<br />

As a consequence, we predict that the verb may appear on either side <strong>of</strong> the partition<br />

between given and new. 17 If the head itself undergoes G-movement, the partition follows<br />

the head. 18 If the head moves in order to facilitate G-movement, the partition precedes the<br />

head. Thus we predict the pattern to be as in (34).<br />

(34) a. O V || S ←− head undergoes G-movement<br />

b. O || V S ←− head facilitates G-movement<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern is indeed correct. Example (32-c) is not only a felicitous answer to the question<br />

And what about the lollipop? What happened to the lollipop? but it is also a felicitous<br />

answer to the question Who found the lollipop?, as in (35).<br />

(35) a. Who found the lollipop?<br />

b. Lízátko našla || malá holčička.<br />

lollipop.Acc found little girl.Nom<br />

‘A little girl found the lollipop.’<br />

In other words, the semantic ambiguity that we found with a basic word order repeats itself<br />

on a smaller scale here as well. Even though we know that because <strong>of</strong> G-movement <strong>of</strong><br />

the object, the object is given (translated as the lollipop), we cannot conclude anything<br />

about the status <strong>of</strong> the verb. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the head might have undergone either G-<br />

movement, or it might have moved only in order to facilitate G-movement. <strong>The</strong> suggested<br />

derivation is given in (36). For now I leave open the question <strong>of</strong> the exact landing site <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movement. In the following graphs, the landing site is marked as ?P.<br />

(36) a. VP<br />

V<br />

Object<br />

b. vP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

Object<br />

17 Notice that the verb can be either the rightmost element in the given part, or it can follow the given part<br />

but it can never intervene between two given elements. Thus if, for example, both the subject and the object<br />

are given the resulting order is either SOV or OSV, depending on other factors such as topicalization.<br />

18 I put aside for now what determines the relative order <strong>of</strong> the given elements. I will address this question<br />

in chapter 3.<br />

24


c. ?P<br />

v-V<br />

vP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

Object<br />

d. ?P<br />

Object ?P<br />

v-V<br />

vP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

Object<br />

I argue that the only difference between the interpretation in which the verb is given and the<br />

interpretation in which the verb is new is in the motivation for head movement. Thus, the<br />

syntactic output for PF and LF is the same. For native speakers, OVS structures presented<br />

out <strong>of</strong> the blue are ambiguous and there is also no difference in the prosody they could use<br />

to disambiguate.<br />

We have now seen that there are two configurations under which information structure<br />

ambiguity arises: either no G-movement takes place, thus, no partition is established, or the<br />

partition could be placed in more than one position because there is no way to distinguish<br />

between G-movement <strong>of</strong> the verb and independently motivated verb movement. It is left<br />

up to the semantic interface to decide according to the relevant context. In chapter 4 I will<br />

present a semantic system which is designed to make this type <strong>of</strong> decision.<br />

In order to obtain the ambiguity <strong>of</strong> the new versus given partition with respect to the<br />

verb and in order to derive the correct word order, I have assumed that G-movement is<br />

dependent on head movement. In the next section I will look closely at predictions this assumption<br />

makes. I will present evidence that the domain in which G-movement takes place<br />

is indeed independently restricted by restrictions on head movement. Thus, head movement<br />

and G-movement share the same locality restrictions. This fact thus provides further<br />

25


support in favor <strong>of</strong> the assumption that G-movement is dependent on head movement.<br />

1.4 <strong>The</strong> boundedness <strong>of</strong> G-movement<br />

In this section, I will explore the further predictions and consequences <strong>of</strong> restricting G-<br />

movement by head movement, namely, differences in locality restrictions on G-movement<br />

that depend on the movement properties <strong>of</strong> the relevant facilitating head.<br />

First <strong>of</strong> all, since head movement is clause bounded, we expect G-movement to be<br />

clause bounded as well. This is indeed correct. As we can see in the following examples,<br />

given elements can move only to the edge <strong>of</strong> their own embedded clause, even if the matrix<br />

clause introduces only new information.<br />

(37) For a long time I didn’t know what was going on with Mary.<br />

a. Ale pak mi bývalá spolužačka řekla, že Marie si vzala Petra.<br />

but then me former classmate told that Marie.Nom REFL took Petr.Acc<br />

‘But then a former classmate <strong>of</strong> mine told me that Marie got married to Petr.’<br />

b. Ale pak mi bývalá spolužačka řekla, že Marii potkalo velké<br />

but then me former classmate told that Marie.Acc met big<br />

štěstí.<br />

happiness<br />

‘But then a former classmate <strong>of</strong> mine told me that Marie got extremely lucky.<br />

(She won a lottery.)’<br />

c. #Marii mi bývalá spolužačka řekla, že potkalo velké štěstí.<br />

Marie.Acc me former classmate told that met big happiness<br />

In this respect G-movement differs from both wh-movement and contrastive focus movement,<br />

which are not clause bound, as can be seen in (38) and (39).<br />

(38) Koho, že jsi říkala, že si Marie<br />

whom.Acc that Aux-you said that REFL Marie.Nom<br />

‘Whom did you say Marie is going to Mary?’<br />

bude<br />

will<br />

brát?<br />

take<br />

(39) Pavla, jsem ti říkala, si bude brát Marie, ne Lucie.<br />

Pavel.Acc Aux-I you.Dat said REFL will take Marie.Nom not Lucie.Nom<br />

‘I’ve (already) told you that it is Pavel who is going to marry Marie not Lucie.’<br />

If G-movement were only restricted to clause boundaries, one might come up with another<br />

explanation. For example, one could argue that this follows from the fact that G-movement<br />

is A-movement (see appendix A for details)sec:AMovement. If this were the right explanation,<br />

we would not expect further locality restrictions. In contrast, if G-movement is<br />

restricted by head movement, we predict that G-movement is also not possible out <strong>of</strong> infinitival<br />

domains because the infinitive head cannot move out <strong>of</strong> the domain either. <strong>The</strong><br />

latter prediction is borne out, as can be seen in (40). <strong>The</strong> relevant verbal head is marked by<br />

a box.<br />

26


(40) What happened to the antique chair you got many years ago from Mary?<br />

a. Můj bývalý partner se pokusil tu židli<br />

my former partner REFL tried that chair<br />

‘My ex-partner tried to burn the chair.’<br />

b. Můj bývalý partner chtěl tu židli spálit .<br />

my former partner wanted that chair burn.Inf<br />

‘My ex-partner wanted to burn the chair.’<br />

c. Můj bývalý partner dokázal tu židli spálit .<br />

my former partner managed that chair burn.Inf<br />

‘My ex-partner managed to burn the chair.’<br />

d. #Tu židli můj bývalý partner dokázal spálit .<br />

that chair my former partner managed burn.Inf<br />

spálit .<br />

burn.Inf<br />

‘My ex-partner managed to burn the chair. (OK: As to the chair, my expartner<br />

managed to burn it.)’<br />

If we do not bind G-movement to head movement, this behavior is unexpected also because<br />

other elements, for example clitics, can climb up from the infinitival domain as in (41) with<br />

a reflexive tantum posadit se ‘sit down’.<br />

(41) a. Petr se chtěl posadit .<br />

Petr.Nom REFL wanted sit-down<br />

‘Petr wanted to sit down.’<br />

b. Petr se dokázal posadit<br />

Petr.Nom REFL managed sit-down<br />

‘Petr managed to sit down.’<br />

.<br />

If we assume that infinitives that allow clitic climbing are restructuring verbs (cf. Dotlačil<br />

2004; Rezac 2005), then the infinitival restriction on G-movement cannot follow from presence<br />

<strong>of</strong> a phase boundary. Whatever allows the clitic to get to the main clause, should be<br />

able to get the given element out as well. 19 As we can see, however, this is not so. On the<br />

other hand, if we allow G-movement <strong>of</strong> α G to take place only if the relevant head moves as<br />

well, the difference between clitics and given material is predicted.<br />

Furthermore, we predict that if a verbal head is selected by another verbal head (an<br />

auxiliary), G-movement should be blocked as well. We find a useful minimal pair if we<br />

compare sentences in the Present or the Past tense with sentences in the Future tense. <strong>The</strong><br />

main verb in the future tense, in contrast to other tenses where the verb moves out <strong>of</strong> VP,<br />

stays in VP and the future auxiliary is base generated in vP (Veselovská, 2004; Kučerová,<br />

2005). As we can see in (42), (43), and (44), the difference in the different head movement<br />

properties, especially lack <strong>of</strong> head movement in the Future tense, propagates to the domain<br />

in which an element can undergo G-movement. While in (42) and (43) the verbal head is<br />

free to move and the given object can therefore G-move, in (44) the given object can only<br />

19 Clitic climbing in Czech is a syntactic, not a phonological, process. This can be shown, for example, by<br />

the fact that different clitics in Czech climb differently. See Dotlačil 2004 for more details.<br />

27


immediately precede the main verb. Any other instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement is not possible. 20<br />

(42) a. What happened to the book?<br />

b. Tu knihu || dala Marie Petrovi. ←− Past<br />

the book.Acc gave Marie.Nom Petr.Dat<br />

‘Marie gave the book to Petr.’<br />

(43) a. What is happening to the book?<br />

b. Tu knihu || dává Marie Petrovi. ←− Present<br />

the book.Acc gives Marie.Nom Petr.Dat<br />

‘Marie gives the book to Petr.’<br />

(44) a. What will happen to the book?<br />

b. Marie bude tu knihu dávat<br />

Marie.Nom will the book.Acc give.Inf<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

c. #Tu knihu bude Marie dávat<br />

the book.Acc will Marie.Nom give.Inf<br />

Petrovi. ←− Future<br />

Petr.Dat<br />

Petrovi.<br />

Petr.Dat<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

(OK as ‘As to the book (in contrast to the violin), Marie will give it to Peter.)<br />

Interestingly, we find differing morphology even within one tense – the past tense. While<br />

there is no overt auxiliary for 3rd person, 1st and 2nd person are formed by a finite auxiliary<br />

and a past participle. If G-movement depends on head movement we predict non-local G-<br />

movement <strong>of</strong> a given object to be possible with a 3rd person subject but not with a 1st or a<br />

2nd person subject. This prediction is indeed correct, as can be seen in (66) and (67).<br />

(45) 3sg.: Non-local G-movement possible:<br />

a. What happened to the boat that got demeged in the last storm?<br />

b. Lod’ opravil jeden technik.<br />

boat.Acc repaired one technician.Nom<br />

‘A technician repaired the boat.’<br />

(46) 1pl.: Only local G-movement:<br />

a. What happened to the boat that got demaged in the last storm?<br />

b. Jeden technik a já jsme lod’ opravili .<br />

one technician.Nom and I Aux.1pl boat.Acc repaired<br />

‘A technician and I repaired the boat.’<br />

Tying G-movement to head movement makes an additional prediction. If there is no head<br />

that can move, only very local G-movement should be possible. A case to consider is a<br />

small clause. As we can see in (47), this prediction is indeed correct. As with infinitives,<br />

in a small clause, a given element can undergo only very local G-movement. No further<br />

20 <strong>The</strong>se examples are vastly simplified. To keep the pairs minimal I use an iterative form in the present<br />

tense. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the corresponding word does not have a periphrastic future. Another important point<br />

is that (44-c) is a plausible structure but the object would have to be interpreted as a topic (As to the book,<br />

Marie will give the book to Peter.).<br />

28


movement is possible.<br />

(47) a. Why does Peter look so happy?<br />

b. Marie je na Petra pyšná<br />

Marie.Nom is <strong>of</strong> Petr proud<br />

‘Marie is found <strong>of</strong> Peter.’<br />

c. #Na Petra je Marie pyšná.<br />

<strong>of</strong> Petr is Marie proud<br />

.<br />

Another interesting pattern arises from interactions <strong>of</strong> G-movement and the EPP requirement<br />

<strong>of</strong> T. Simplifying considerably, in Czech T attracts whatever is the structurally closest<br />

element (for more details see Kučerová (2005)). Thus, if there is a subject in Spec,vP, T<br />

attracts the subject. On the other hand, if there is no subject (Czech is a pro-drop language),<br />

T may attract the verbal head occupying v. See the examples in (48) and (49), illustrating<br />

the point.<br />

(48) a. Marie koupila husu.<br />

Marie.Nom bought goose.Acc<br />

‘Marie bought a goose.’<br />

b. [ TP Marie T [ vP t Marie bought goose ] ]<br />

(49) a. Koupila husu.<br />

bought goose.Acc<br />

‘She bought a goose.’<br />

b. [ TP bought T [ vP t bought goose ] ]<br />

We can now make an interesting prediction. If a given element moves to the left edge <strong>of</strong><br />

vP, then it can be attracted by T even if T is realized as an auxiliary. Thus, we expect to<br />

find a word order that superficially looks like a violation <strong>of</strong> the head movement constraint<br />

on G-movement. This is correct, as can be seen in (51). Notice that there is nothing wrong<br />

with moving a given element over an auxiliary. <strong>The</strong> given element just cannot undergo<br />

G-movement. Other instances <strong>of</strong> movement are not a problem.<br />

(50) Scenario: And what about all the money you inherited?<br />

(51) Všechny peníze jsem poslala osamělým dětem. ←− Past<br />

all money Aux.1sg sent lonely children.Dat<br />

‘I sent all (the) money to lonely children.’<br />

(52) Past tense:<br />

a. VP level: the given object moves over V:<br />

29


VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

b. V moves to v:<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

c. the object undergoes G-movement over v:<br />

vP<br />

money<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

t money<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

d. T-auxiliary is merged and probes for the closest element:<br />

30


TP<br />

Aux<br />

vP<br />

money<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

t money<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

e. the given object moves to T:<br />

TP<br />

money<br />

TP<br />

Aux<br />

vP<br />

t money<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

t money<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

In contrast, in the future tense there is no V-to-v movement. Thus, a given object cannot<br />

reach the vP edge, as shown by the object in (54). Since the future auxiliary is base generated<br />

in v and there is no overt subject, T attracts the auxiliary. <strong>The</strong> derivation is schematized<br />

in (55).<br />

(53) Scenario: And what about all the money you will inherit?<br />

(54) Budu všechny peníze posílat osamělým dětem.←− Future<br />

will.1sg all money send.Inf lonely children.Dat<br />

31


‘I will send all (the) money to lonely children.’<br />

(55) Future tense:<br />

a. VP level: the given object moves over V:<br />

VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

give<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

b. v-auxiliary is merged and the object cannot G-move further:<br />

vP<br />

Aux<br />

VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

give<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

c. T is merged and probes for the closest element:<br />

TP<br />

T<br />

vP<br />

Aux<br />

VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

give<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

d. the auxiliary moves to T:<br />

32


TP<br />

Aux<br />

TP<br />

T<br />

vP<br />

t Aux<br />

VP<br />

money<br />

VP<br />

give<br />

VP<br />

children<br />

t money<br />

Notice that the sentences we have considered in this section crucially differ from the sentences<br />

that originally motivated introducing G-movement into the system. <strong>The</strong> difference<br />

is that if head movement is blocked, α G may be asymmetrically c-commanded by new<br />

material. Recall the definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement from (11), repeated below as (56). Even<br />

though we can identify what element must be given, we cannot establish a perfect partition<br />

between given and new as we were able to do in the previous cases.<br />

(56) G-Movement [version 1]<br />

G-movement must take place<br />

a. iff α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a non-G element,<br />

b. unless the movement is independently blocked.<br />

<strong>The</strong> definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement given in (11)/(56) takes care <strong>of</strong> these cases with the clause<br />

unless the movement is independently blocked. Thus, the pattern that arises can be described<br />

as do as much as you can. But does this mean that anything goes? I will address<br />

this question in the next section. I will show that if α G is required to G-move, α G must<br />

move at least once.<br />

In chapter 4, I will address the question why it is sometimes okay to move a given element<br />

only locally even if there is a higher new element, while in other cases, non-local<br />

movement is required. <strong>The</strong> distinction will follow from the way we will interpret givenness.<br />

For now, let’s stay with the s<strong>of</strong>t constraint formulation which requires a given element<br />

to move across as many new elements as syntactically possible.<br />

In this section, we have seen that tying G-movement to head movement makes correct<br />

predictions since G-movement is able to move only as far as the relevant head can move. If<br />

movement <strong>of</strong> the head is independently blocked (for example, by the head being selected<br />

by another head), G-movement can only be very local.<br />

33


1.5 <strong>The</strong> distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns: G-movement as a last<br />

Resort<br />

In this section (i) I will provide independent evidence for the assumption that G-movement<br />

is a last resort operation. (ii) I will also address the question <strong>of</strong> what happens if α G is<br />

required to move but the movement is independently blocked by syntax. I will also introduce<br />

an observation that elements that are given by their lexical entry, such as pronouns,<br />

do not undergo G-movement. I will use the difference between lexically given items and<br />

non-lexically given items to investigate when G-movement must take place.<br />

I will first look at cases in which G-movement is independently blocked. In contrast to<br />

the previously discussed cases where α G was able to locally G-move, we will now consider<br />

cases in which α G cannot move at all. We will see that, in such a configuration, if α G is<br />

asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element, α G must be realized by a pronoun, i.e.,<br />

an element that comes marked as given from the lexicon. I will argue that if G-movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> α is required, α must G-move at least once. On the other hand, as we will see, if α G<br />

is trapped in a position that is not asymmetrically c-commanded by any new element, α G<br />

does not need to be lexically given. This fact will provide independent evidence for the<br />

assumption that G-movement is a last resort operation.<br />

I will refine this analysis in chapter 4 where I will introduce a global comparison system<br />

which will enforce lexical givenness in cases that would not be otherwise interpreted<br />

as given. In this chapter, however, we will stay with the surface oriented generalization.<br />

A question we have not asked yet is whether G-movement applies to all given elements.<br />

<strong>The</strong> answer is no. G-movement does not apply to pronouns. To see this, consider the<br />

example in (57). As we can see, there is a difference in the position <strong>of</strong> the same given<br />

element depending on whether the element is realized as a full DP (Pavel) or as a pronoun<br />

(ho/jeho, ‘him’). 21<br />

(57) What do you know about Pavel?<br />

a. Marie ho viděla na nádraží. ̌new > pronoun<br />

Marie.Nom him.Acc saw on railway-station<br />

b. #Marie Pavla viděla na nádraží. # new > DP<br />

Marie.Nom Pavla.Acc saw on railway-station<br />

21 Personal pronouns in Czech come in two flavors: weak pronouns, in this case ho, and strong pronouns,<br />

in this case jeho (Cardinaletti and Starke, 1999). <strong>The</strong>y differ in their syntactic distribution and interpretation.<br />

Crucially, weak pronouns are excluded from the left edge <strong>of</strong> a prosodic constituent, including the sentence<br />

initial position. <strong>The</strong> reason is that Czech requires main word stress to be aligned to the left edge <strong>of</strong> a prosodic<br />

constituent (see, for example, Petr et al. 1986; Palková 1994; van der Hulst 1999) and since weak pronouns<br />

cannot be stressed they are excluded from the left edge. If a pronoun needs to be, for instance, in the sentence<br />

initial position, it must be realized as a strong pronoun. For further details about the distinction between weak<br />

and strong pronouns see Cardinaletti and Starke 1999. More details about distributional properties <strong>of</strong> Czech<br />

weak pronouns can be found at Vos and Veselovská 1999.<br />

34


c. #Jeho viděla Marie na nádraží. # pronoun new t<br />

him.Acc saw Marie.Nom on railway-station<br />

d. Pavla viděla Marie na nádraží. ̌DP new t<br />

Pavel.Acc saw Marie.Nom on railway-station<br />

‘Marie saw him/Pavel in the railway-station.’<br />

One could argue that pronouns are excluded from the sentence initial position on independent<br />

grounds. As we can see in (58), with a different information structure, i.e, if the<br />

pronoun is contrastive, the pronoun initial clause is fully acceptable.<br />

(58) JEHO Marie neviděla. Jenom Petra.<br />

him.Acc Marie.Nom not-saw only Petr.Acc<br />

‘Marie didn’t see HIM. She saw only Peter.’<br />

It is well established that pronouns undergo movement from their base generated position.<br />

22 I argue, however, that this is not G-movement. If pronouns underwent G-movement<br />

we would expect them to appear in the same position as full DPs that are given. Most importantly,<br />

they would not be able to be asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element. As<br />

can be seen in (57-a), no such requirement holds for pronouns. In this particular example,<br />

ho ‘him’ is asymmetrically c-commanded by Marie, a new element, but this is not a reason<br />

for the pronoun to move. I argue that pronouns do not undergo G-movement because<br />

G-movement is a last resort operation and as such it takes place if and only if the relevant<br />

semantic interpretation would not be otherwise available. Since pronouns are already<br />

marked from the lexicon as given, G-movement is not needed, hence not allowed. As such,<br />

we can understand G-movement as a disambiguating method: G-movement applies only<br />

to syntactic elements that are lexically ambiguous, i.e., G-movement applies only to lexical<br />

items that can be interpreted either as given, or as new.<br />

This brings up an important point: what is the purpose <strong>of</strong> G-movement? If G-movement<br />

is a last resort operation, it cannot be the grammatical operation which marks or licenses<br />

an element as given. And yet, it does not apply to an element which is already given. I will<br />

argue in chapter 4 that the purpose <strong>of</strong> G-movement is to create a syntactic configuration<br />

that can be interpreted by the semantic component as containing given elements. If an element<br />

is already in the right configuration, G-movement does not apply to it. If an element<br />

is already given, G-movement does not take place either.<br />

At this point we do not have the right tools to explain the interactions between given<br />

elements and G-movement. Before we can get there, we need to understand better the<br />

properties <strong>of</strong> the syntactic configuration in which G-movement occurs.<br />

So far our system does not contain anything that would enforce the difference between<br />

elements marked as given from the lexicon and elements marked as given by the syntax. I<br />

22 Czech weak pronouns are usually analyzed as second position clitics. As such they move to a position<br />

following the first syntactic constituent. For details see, for example, Veselovská 1995; Franks and King<br />

2000; Bošković 2001.<br />

35


will thus modify the definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement from (11) in order to capture the distinction<br />

between lexically given and lexically ambiguous items. <strong>The</strong> new definition <strong>of</strong> G-movement<br />

is given in (59). A definition <strong>of</strong> what it means to be lexically given is in (60).<br />

(59) G-Movement [version 2]<br />

G-movement is required iff α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a non-G element;<br />

unless<br />

a. the movement is independently blocked, or<br />

b. α G is lexically given.<br />

(60) Lexically given<br />

α G is lexically given if its semantic lexical entry requires α G to have a salient<br />

antecedent A such that α and A corefer.<br />

Let’s first have a look at what happens if α G is required to move but it is in a position<br />

from which it cannot move at all. 23 In Czech, G-movement is impossible out <strong>of</strong> a specifier<br />

or out <strong>of</strong> a syntactic island. 24 Consider the context in (61). As we can see in (62)–(64), if<br />

a given element is within a specifier, it cannot be realized as a bare NP/DP, as can be seen<br />

in (a)–(b). 25 To make such a sentence felicitous, the given element must be realized either<br />

as a possessive pronoun, as in the (c) examples, or the relevant DP must be modified by a<br />

demonstrative pronoun, as in the (d) examples.<br />

(61) Na programu byla diskuse o nové učitelce. ←− context I<br />

on program was discussion about new teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the program was a discussion about a new teacher.’<br />

(62) a. #Důvodem bylo podezření, že dcera (nové) učitelky bere drogy.<br />

reason was suspicion that daughter <strong>of</strong>-new teacher takes drugs<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> reason was a suspicion that a daughter <strong>of</strong> a new teacher is a drug-addict.’<br />

b. #Důvodem bylo podezření, že učitelčina dcera bere drogy.<br />

reason was suspicion that teacher’s daughter takes drugs<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> reason was a suspicion that a daughter <strong>of</strong> a new teacher is a drug-addict.’<br />

c. Důvodem bylo podezření, že její dcera bere drogy.<br />

reason was suspicion that her daughter takes drugs<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> reason was a suspicion that her daughter is a drug-addict.’<br />

d. Důvodem bylo podezření, že dcera té (nové) učitelky bere drogy.<br />

reason was suspicion that daughter <strong>of</strong>-that new teacher takes drugs<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> reason was a suspicion that a daughter <strong>of</strong> that new teacher is a drugaddict.’<br />

23 I thank to Danny Fox for suggesting this test to me and helping me to figure out its consequences.<br />

24 It has been argued that Slavic languages, including Czech, allow Left-branch extraction, thus, movement<br />

out <strong>of</strong> the specifier might be possible, see for example, Bošković 2005; Citko 2006. Putting aside whether or<br />

not there is Left-branch extraction in Czech, the restriction on moving from specifiers does not need to follow<br />

from this constraint. Since no head movement can take place out <strong>of</strong> a specifier, G-movement is expected to<br />

be blocked independently <strong>of</strong> the Left-branch extraction properties <strong>of</strong> Czech.<br />

25 In the (a) examples, the DP is realized post-nominally, while in the (b) examples it is realized prenominally.<br />

Both options are possible in Czech. <strong>The</strong> difference is that a DP in a pre-nominal position cannot<br />

be further modified.<br />

36


(63) a. #Diskuse proběhla bez vědomí (nové) učitelky.<br />

discussion ran without knowledge <strong>of</strong>-new teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> discussion went without knowledge <strong>of</strong> a new teacher.’<br />

b. #Diskuse proběhla bez učitelčina vědomí .<br />

discussion ran without teacher’s knowledge<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> discussion went without knowledge <strong>of</strong> a teacher.’<br />

c. Diskuse proběhla bez jejího vědomí.<br />

discussion ran without her knowledge<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> discussion went without her knowledge.’<br />

d. Diskuse proběhla bez vědomí té (nové) učitelky.<br />

discussion ran without knowledge <strong>of</strong>-the new teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> discussion went without knowledge <strong>of</strong> the new teacher.’<br />

(64) a. #Nikdo nebyl na straně učitelky.<br />

no-one not-was at side <strong>of</strong>-teacher<br />

‘No one was on the side <strong>of</strong> a teacher.’<br />

b. #Nikdo nebyl na učitelčině straně.<br />

no-one not-was at teacher’s side<br />

‘No one was on side <strong>of</strong> a teacher.’<br />

c. Nikdo nebyl na její straně.<br />

no-one not-was at her side<br />

‘No one was on her side.’<br />

d. Nikdo nebyl na straně té učitelky.<br />

no-one not-was at side <strong>of</strong>-the teacher<br />

‘No one was on the side <strong>of</strong> the teacher.’<br />

As we can see in (65) and (66), other possible continuations <strong>of</strong> the context in (61), the<br />

same observation holds also for islands. If an element that needs to undergo G-movement<br />

is trapped in a syntactic island, then such an element must be realized either as a personal<br />

pronoun, or it must be modified by a demonstrative pronoun.<br />

(65) a. #Debata proběhla bez učitelky.<br />

debate ran without teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> debate took place without a teacher.’<br />

b. Debata proběhla bez ní.<br />

debate ran without her<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> debate took place without her.’<br />

c. Debata proběhla bez této učitelky.<br />

debate ran without this teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> debate took place without this teacher.’<br />

(66) a. Bylo to myšleno jako útok proti ní<br />

was it though as attack against her<br />

‘It was meant as an attack against her.’<br />

b. #Bylo to myšleno jako útok proti učitelce<br />

was it though as attack against teacher<br />

‘It was meant as an attack against a teacher.’<br />

37


c. Bylo to myšleno jako útok proti této učitelce<br />

was it though as attack against teacher<br />

‘It was meant as an attack against this teacher.’<br />

Consider now the example in (67). <strong>The</strong> example is <strong>of</strong>fered here as a control showing that<br />

in general there is no problem with having the unmodified form teacher as a continuation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the discourse in (61). Crucially, in this example, G-movement is not required since there<br />

is no new element asymmetrically c-commanding the DP učitelka ‘teacher’.<br />

(67) Učitelka o diskusi (ale) nevěděla.<br />

teacher about discussion but not-knew<br />

‘However, the teacher did not know about the discussion.’<br />

I argue that the reason why the non-modified DP in (62)–(66) is infelicitous as a continuation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the context given in (61) is that the DP needs to be interpreted as given but it is in a<br />

syntactic position from which it cannot undergo G-movement. Since there is no syntactic<br />

operation that could achieve the desired semantic interpretation, inserting an element that<br />

is lexically marked as given is the only option. 26 <strong>The</strong> generalization stating the relation<br />

between pronouns and G-movement is given in (68).<br />

(68) Generalization about syntactic distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns<br />

If α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element and α G cannot move at<br />

least once, then α G must be lexically given.<br />

<strong>The</strong> above pattern provides an independent argument that G-movement is a last resort operation.<br />

If there is no new element asymmetrically c-commanding α G , α G may be realized<br />

as a full DP even if it is in a position from which it cannot move. It follows that an element<br />

can be interpreted as given even if it does not undergo G-movement. Thus, we can<br />

conclude that the purpose <strong>of</strong> G-movement cannot be to mark or license an element as given<br />

(for example, by checking a G(iven) feature). <strong>The</strong>re must be other tools to interpret an<br />

element as given. In chapter 4 I will argue that the syntax-semantics interface does exactly<br />

that.<br />

If G-movement is a last resort operation, we predict that the restriction on specifiers<br />

observed in (62)–(64) should disappear if the relevant specifier is the highest element in the<br />

structure. As we can see in (69) this is indeed correct.<br />

(69) Učitelovi žáci si totiž stěžovali na jeho učební metody.<br />

teacher’s pupils REFL PART complained at his teaching methods<br />

‘Students <strong>of</strong> the teacher complained about his teaching methods.’<br />

Additional support for the argument that G-movement is a last resort operation comes<br />

from coordinated DPs. If we assume the coordinate structure constraint (Ross, 1967), we<br />

predict that a DP should not be able to move out from a coordination. Thus, a coordinated<br />

given DP should be degraded, unless it is modified by a demonstrative pronoun. As we can<br />

see in (70), this prediction is borne out.<br />

26 Another option would be to choose a structure which allows G-movement to take place.<br />

38


(70) a. #Žáky a učitelku to překvapilo.<br />

students and teacher it surprised<br />

‘Students and a teacher were surprised by that.’<br />

b. Žáky a tu učitelku to překvapilo.<br />

students and that teacher it surprised<br />

‘Students and that teacher were surprised by that.’<br />

c. Žáky i ji to překvapilo.<br />

students and her it surprised<br />

‘She (=the teacher) and students were surprised by that.’<br />

At the same time we predict that, if the given element ‘teacher’ is the first conjunct, there<br />

should be no need for G-movement to take place because according to the definition <strong>of</strong> G-<br />

movement in (11), G-movement takes place only if there is a new element asymmetrically<br />

c-commanding the given DP. Thus, if the given DP is independently high enough, it should<br />

not matter that it is caught within a coordination. As we can see in (71), this prediction is<br />

borne out as well.<br />

(71) Na<br />

on<br />

programu<br />

program<br />

byla<br />

was<br />

debata o novém učiteli. . . .<br />

debate about new teacher.Masc<br />

(72) Učitele a (jeho) žáky to překvapilo.<br />

teacher and his students it surprised<br />

‘A teacher and (his) students were surprised by it.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (73) are here as a control. If the same coordination is in an object position,<br />

i.e., if it is further embedded in the structure, the fact that the given DP is the first conjunct<br />

is <strong>of</strong> no help.<br />

(73) a. #To se nelíbilo ani učiteli ani žákům.<br />

it REFL not-liked nor teacher nor students<br />

‘Neither a teacher nor students were happy about it.’<br />

b. To se nelíbilo ani jemu ani žákům.<br />

it REFL not-liked nor him nor students<br />

‘Neither he nor students were happy about it.’<br />

c. To se nelíbilo ani tomu učiteli ani žákům.<br />

it REFL not-liked nor that teacher nor students<br />

‘Neither the/that teacher nor students were happy about it.’<br />

So far so good. We have seen an independent argument for the assumption that G-movement<br />

is a last resort operation. At the same time we have seen that if α G is required to G-move,<br />

α G must G-move at least once. Thus, we can formulate a minimal requirement on G-<br />

movement, as in (74).<br />

(74) Minimal requirement on G-movement:<br />

If α G is asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element, α G must move at least<br />

once. Otherwise, α G must be lexically given.<br />

Immediate questions that arise are (i) what happens to an α G that does not have a lexically<br />

39


given counterpart, and (ii) why is one instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement sometimes sufficient but<br />

more than one instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement is required other times. I will leave the questions<br />

open for now and I will come back to them in chapter 4.<br />

In this section, I have provided two arguments that G-movement is a last resort syntactic<br />

operation. <strong>The</strong> arguments were based on two facts about the distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns in<br />

Czech. First, I have shown that pronouns do not undergo G-movement. I have suggested<br />

that this shows that G-movement applies only to elements that are to be interpreted as given<br />

but that at the same time do not enter the derivation lexically marked as given. <strong>The</strong> second<br />

part <strong>of</strong> this section addressed the question <strong>of</strong> what happens if an element cannot undergo G-<br />

movement because <strong>of</strong> independent syntactic restrictions on movement, such as islands. We<br />

have observed that in such configurations an element must already come from the lexicon<br />

marked as given because there is no other way it could be marked as given in syntax. Last,<br />

we have seen that if an element is trapped within an island but high enough in the structure,<br />

the fact that it cannot undergo movement does not matter because the relevant interpretation<br />

can be obtained without movement. Thus G-movement is not required.<br />

1.6 Summary<br />

In this chapter, I have <strong>of</strong>fered several generalizations about the distribution <strong>of</strong> given and<br />

new information in a Czech clause. I have shown that in an optimal configuration, the<br />

given part linearly precedes the new part and the partition is marked by a verb which can<br />

be on either side <strong>of</strong> the partition. I have proposed to account for the linear order facts in<br />

terms <strong>of</strong> G-movement: an economy restricted movement that requires a given element to<br />

move only if such an element is asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element and is not<br />

lexically marked as given. I have presented several arguments in favor <strong>of</strong> understanding G-<br />

movement as a last resort operation, including arguments from the distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns<br />

and the semantic ambiguity <strong>of</strong> certain strings. We have also seen that elements that are<br />

lexically given do not undergo G-movement and that the linear partition between given and<br />

new is not always perfect. In chapters 2 and 3 I will develop the current toy system in detail.<br />

After that, in chapter 4, I will refine my answer to the question <strong>of</strong> how G-movement is<br />

motivated and how it is treated by the interfaces. In particular, I will argue that G-movement<br />

is a free syntactic movement, the purpose <strong>of</strong> which is to create a configuration which can be<br />

semantically interpreted in a way that is required by the contextually established common<br />

ground.<br />

40


Chapter 2<br />

G-movement<br />

In chapter 1, I introduced several basic generalizations about Czech word order and its dependence<br />

on the information structure <strong>of</strong> an utterance. I proposed to account for the Czech<br />

word order facts by movement which takes place only if a given element is asymmetrically<br />

c-commanded by a new element. I called this movement G-movement. I provided<br />

evidence that G-movement is restricted by head movement. In particular, a given element<br />

may G-move only if the head in the projection <strong>of</strong> which the given element was base generated<br />

moves as well. Another important point I made was that G-movement cannot be<br />

the grammatical tool that marks or licenses elements as given. <strong>The</strong> evidence comes from<br />

the fact that only some given elements undergo G-movement. If a given element is in a<br />

configuration where there is no asymmetrically c-commanding new element, the given element<br />

not only does not move, it cannot move. A consequence <strong>of</strong> this observation is that<br />

G-movement does not seem to be feature-driven.<br />

<strong>The</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> this chapter is to formalize the notion <strong>of</strong> G-movement and to fill in parts<br />

<strong>of</strong> the syntactic system that are still missing. In particular, I will look closely at the following<br />

three questions: (i) what is the syntactic target <strong>of</strong> G-movement? (ii) at what point <strong>of</strong><br />

the derivation may G-movement take place? and (iii) what kind <strong>of</strong> syntactic operation is<br />

G-movement?<br />

In section 2.1, I will provide a partial answer to the question <strong>of</strong> what a plausible landing<br />

site <strong>of</strong> G-movement might be. I will argue that Czech has no unique syntactic position that<br />

is always interpreted as given. Thus, we cannot associate G-movement with any particular<br />

syntactic projection. I will refine the analysis <strong>of</strong> possible landing sites <strong>of</strong> G-movement in<br />

section 2.2. I will concentrate on the question <strong>of</strong> when during the derivation G-movement<br />

takes place. I will argue that G-movement may take place after any merge (both internal<br />

and external), thus strengthening the point that G-movement may target various syntactic<br />

positions. In section 2.3, I will explain the apparent lack <strong>of</strong> a unique landing site <strong>of</strong> G-<br />

movement and the fact that G-movement may take place after any merge as a consequence<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement being parasitic on head movement. I will show how the head movement<br />

restriction relates to the timing <strong>of</strong> G-movement and to the apparent lack <strong>of</strong> a landing site<br />

for G-movement. In particular, I will argue that the parasitic nature <strong>of</strong> this type <strong>of</strong> merge<br />

is closely connected to the strict locality conditions and to the lack <strong>of</strong> a unique syntactic<br />

41


landing site. In chapter 3, I will use the formalization <strong>of</strong>fered in this chapter to show<br />

how G-movement, a relatively simple syntactic tool, can account for complex word order<br />

patterns.<br />

2.1 <strong>The</strong> target <strong>of</strong> G-movement<br />

In this section, I will address the question <strong>of</strong> the landing site <strong>of</strong> G-movement. I will show<br />

that in Czech there is no unique syntactic position that is always interpreted as given. <strong>The</strong><br />

argument will be based on properties <strong>of</strong> movement to T. <strong>The</strong> logic behind this move is that<br />

the element that moves to Spec,TP or to T is <strong>of</strong>ten interpreted as given. In the same time<br />

such an element can be new as well. If, for example, Spec,TP were a unique syntactic<br />

position for being interpreted as given, the possibility <strong>of</strong> new elements in Spec,TP would<br />

be unexpected. 1 I will argue that movement to Spec,TP is a result <strong>of</strong> an Attract Closest<br />

condition on T and as such it has nothing to do with the information structure nature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

projection. I suggest that the ambiguous property <strong>of</strong> movement to Spec,TP can be extended<br />

to other functional projections as well. 2<br />

Notice that the argument goes only in one direction. It says that it cannot be true that<br />

whatever moves to Spec,TP must be given. Thus, the argument does not exclude the possibility<br />

that whatever is to be interpreted as given moves to Spec,TP. We have seen, however,<br />

in section 1.4 that this is not true either. In section 2.2, I will provide examples that make<br />

the point that G-movement can target other positions as well.<br />

We now proceed to the first half <strong>of</strong> the argument, i.e., to the claim that Spec,TP does not<br />

have a uniform interpretation. We have already seen in the discussion <strong>of</strong> basic word orders<br />

(in section 1.2), that in the basic word order the leftmost element can be either given or new.<br />

Consider the example in (1). Nějaká paní ‘some lady’ does not need to be presupposed and<br />

it can still occupy the subject position (Spec,TP).<br />

(1) a. What happened?<br />

b. Nějaká paní poslala osamělým dětem dárky.<br />

some lady.Nom sent lonely children.Dat presents.Acc<br />

‘Some lady sent presents to lonely children.’<br />

I argue that movement to T (Spec,TP or head-adjunction to T) in Czech is driven by an<br />

EPP-like principle, not by, for example, some given feature (see also Saito (1989); Tateishi<br />

(1994); Sauerland (1999) for scrambling in Japanese). If this is correct, we predict that<br />

movement to Spec,TP is dependent on the internal structure <strong>of</strong> vP, in the sense that it is the<br />

highest element within vP that moves to Spec,TP by virtue <strong>of</strong> being closest. Thus, even in<br />

1 <strong>The</strong> argument is in line with Lavine and Freidin (2002); Bailyn (2003), among others, who argue that<br />

Spec,TP is not a designated given position.<br />

2 <strong>The</strong> argument crucially assumes that given DPs target an A-position. One might argue that the given<br />

interpretation arises only if the relevant DP undergoes A-bar movement. I will argue in the appendix that<br />

G-movement is indeed A-movement. Thus, there is no reason to assume that there is a positional difference<br />

between a DP being interpreted as given and a DP being interpreted as new.<br />

42


asic word order cases we expect word order variations depending on the internal structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> vP.<br />

We have already seen such a case in the discussion <strong>of</strong> unergative and unaccusative verbs<br />

in section 1.1. Consider again the examples in (2) and (3). As these examples show, there<br />

is a word order difference between unergative and unaccusative verbs. While an unergative<br />

verb follows the subject, an unaccusative verb linearly precedes the subject.<br />

(2) Basic word order <strong>of</strong> unergative verbs:<br />

a. [Marie tancovala] New<br />

Marie danced<br />

b. #[Tancovala Marie] New<br />

danced Marie<br />

’Marie danced.’<br />

(3) Basic word order <strong>of</strong> unaccusative verbs:<br />

a. [Přijel vlak] New<br />

arrived train<br />

b. #[Vlak přijel] New<br />

train arrived<br />

‘A train arrived.’<br />

If the subject <strong>of</strong> an unaccusative verb is structurally lower (VP) than the subject <strong>of</strong> an<br />

unergative verb (vP), the word order difference follows under the following assumptions.<br />

First, an inflected verb must undergo movement from V to v. 3 Second, in Czech a DP<br />

can establish syntactic relations by Agree; it therefore does not need to raise from its base<br />

generated position. Third, v does not need to have a specifier. <strong>The</strong> resulting structures are<br />

given in (4) and (5). In the case <strong>of</strong> unergatives, T attracts the subject because it is the closest<br />

element. On the other hand, in the case <strong>of</strong> unaccusatives, T attracts the v head (or the v-V<br />

complex) because it is the structurally closest element. 4<br />

3 In Czech, this condition holds both for finite and inflected infinitival forms such as participles. For<br />

more details on syntax <strong>of</strong> Czech verbal morphology see, for example, Junghanns (1999); Veselovská (2004);<br />

Veselovská and Karlík (2004); Kučerová (2005).<br />

4 In functionalist Czech literature, verbs like ‘arrive’ are traditionally classified as ‘verbs <strong>of</strong> appearing on<br />

the scene’ (Sgall et al., 1980, 1986, among others). Putting aside that it is unclear how to determine this<br />

category, other unaccusative verbs behave in the same way even when they are not semantically verbs <strong>of</strong><br />

appearing on the scene (David Pesetsky, p.c.). See the examples in (i) and (ii).<br />

(i) a. [Líbí se mi knihy] New<br />

like REFL to-me books.Nom<br />

b. #[Knihy se mi líbí] New<br />

books.Nom REFL to-me like<br />

‘Books appeal to me.’<br />

(ii) a. [Existují různé názory na dějiny] New<br />

exist various opinions.Nom at history<br />

b. #[Různé názory na dějiny existují] New<br />

various opinions.Nm at history exist<br />

43


(4) Derivation <strong>of</strong> basic word order <strong>of</strong> unergatives:<br />

TP<br />

T<br />

vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

(5) Derivation <strong>of</strong> basic word order <strong>of</strong> unaccusatives:<br />

TP<br />

T<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

subject<br />

I argue that there is nothing special about unaccusatives and unergatives with respect<br />

to G-movement. <strong>The</strong> leftmost element can also be interpreted as given, without any word<br />

order change, as seen in (6) and (7).<br />

(6) a. What did Mary do?<br />

b. Marie || tancovala<br />

Marie danced<br />

’Marie danced.’<br />

(7) a. What arrived?<br />

b. Přijel<br />

arrived<br />

|| vlak<br />

train<br />

‘A train arrived.’<br />

Furthermore, as the examples in (8) and (9) show, if the word order is reversed, the all<br />

new interpretation is not available anymore and the leftmost element must be interpreted as<br />

given.<br />

(8) a. What happened?<br />

b. #[Tancovala Marie] New<br />

danced Marie<br />

’Marie danced.’<br />

c. Who danced?<br />

d. Tancovala || Marie<br />

danced Marie<br />

’Marie danced.’<br />

‘<strong>The</strong>re are various opinions about history.’<br />

44


(9) a. What happened?<br />

b. #[Vlak přijel] New<br />

train arrived<br />

‘A train arrived.’<br />

c. What about the train?<br />

d. Vlak || přijel<br />

train arrived<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> train arrived.’<br />

To conclude, we have seen that even though an element in Spec,TP is <strong>of</strong>ten interpreted<br />

as given, there is nothing about this particular syntactic position that enforces given interpretation.<br />

I argue that this conclusion can be extended to other syntactic positions as<br />

well, i.e., there is no syntactic projection that is canonically associated in Czech with given<br />

interpretation. As we will see in the next section, G-movement may take place after any<br />

merge. This means that it can target various syntactic positions. One might conclude that<br />

basically any syntactic position is a good enough landing site for G-movement. In section<br />

2.3, I will show, however, that the possibilities <strong>of</strong> various landing sites are restricted by G-<br />

movement being parasitic on head movement. In chapter 4, I will refine the generalization<br />

even further. I will show that the landing sites are further restricted by their semantic type.<br />

2.2 When in the derivation does G-movement apply?<br />

In this section I will address the question <strong>of</strong> timing <strong>of</strong> G-movement. In order to distinguish<br />

among different theories, I will look more closely at more complex word order facts. On<br />

the basis <strong>of</strong> this data, I will argue that G-movement may take place after any merge (both<br />

internal and external).<br />

I will consider in turn three hypotheses: (i) G-movement may take place only at a<br />

phasal level, (ii) G-movement may take place at the end <strong>of</strong> any maximal projection, and<br />

(iii) G-movement may take place after any merge, the hypothesis I will argue for.<br />

(10) Timing <strong>of</strong> G-movement:<br />

G-movement may take place after any merge.<br />

Consider first the examples in (11) and (12). <strong>The</strong> example in (11) shows the basic word<br />

order in a ditransitive construction. <strong>The</strong> example in (12) differs only in a local word order<br />

change: while in the basic word order, the indirect object Pavel precedes the direct object<br />

‘horse’, the order <strong>of</strong> the objects is reversed in (12). <strong>The</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> the order is the same.<br />

(11) Neutral order: S V IO DO<br />

a. What happened? / What did Mary give to Pavel? / . . .<br />

b. (||) Marie (||) dala (||) Pavlovi (||) koně.<br />

Marie.Nom gave to-Pavel.Dat horse.Acc<br />

‘Marie gave Pavel a horse.’<br />

(12) a. Whom did Marie give a horse?<br />

45


. Marie dala koně || Pavlovi.<br />

Marie.Nom gave horse.Acc Pavel.Dat<br />

‘Marie gave a horse to Pavel.’<br />

Crucially, I assume that the DO > IO order is not base generated. <strong>The</strong> argument is difficult<br />

to make though. We will see, however, in chapter 3 that the phenomenon <strong>of</strong> local<br />

G-movement reordering is widespread and rather complex; we can make better predictions<br />

if we do not allow base generated word order permutations. I will also shortly comment on<br />

base generation approaches in the appendix.<br />

With this assumption in place, the question is how exactly we can derive the local word<br />

order change in (12). Much depends on what we assume to be the position <strong>of</strong> the verb.<br />

For example, if we assume that the verb may be higher than vP, for instance at TP, then all<br />

three hypotheses would derive the same result. To see this point, consider the following<br />

derivations.<br />

(i) If G-movement takes place at the end <strong>of</strong> vP phase, we predict the following derivation.<br />

5 After vP is built, the direct object (DO) undergoes G-movement to the edge <strong>of</strong> the<br />

phase, resulting into (13-b). For convenience, I assume a Larsonian VP shell for ditransitive<br />

verbs (Larson, 1988; Hale and Keyser, 2002). In the end <strong>of</strong> this section, I will address<br />

the possibility that ditransitives are formed by an applicative head. In the next step <strong>of</strong> the<br />

derivation, the verb and the subject move to T, as in (13-c). We have seen in 2.1 that in<br />

Czech the subject does not need to move to Spec,TP but let’s assume for the sake <strong>of</strong> the<br />

argument that it might move there. I put aside for now what exactly the landing site <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movement is. I mark the landing site as ?P.<br />

(13) G-movement takes place at a phase level:<br />

a. vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

5 I assume that in Czech vP is a phase. It has been argued that VP can be phase in some languages as<br />

well (cf. Ko (2007) for Korean and Fox and Pesetsky (2005) for Scandinavian languages). <strong>The</strong> difference is<br />

immaterial for our discussion. <strong>The</strong> option that VP is a phase equals to the hypothesis that G-movement takes<br />

place in the end <strong>of</strong> a maximal projection. As we will see shortly, this hypothesis make incorrect predictions<br />

as well.<br />

46


. ?P<br />

DO<br />

vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

c. TP<br />

subject<br />

TP<br />

T ?P<br />

DO<br />

vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

t DO<br />

(ii) If G-movement takes place at the end <strong>of</strong> a maximal projection, the verb may stay in v or<br />

it can move to T. <strong>The</strong> direct object moves to the edge <strong>of</strong> VP and stays there. <strong>The</strong> derivation<br />

proceeds as in (14).<br />

(14) G-movement takes place at a maximal projection level:<br />

47


a. VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

b. vP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

v<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

(iii) If the movement takes place after any merge, the direct object can move immediately<br />

after the indirect object is merged. 6 In the next step the verb moves higher, followed by<br />

merge <strong>of</strong> the subject, as in (15).<br />

(15) G-movement takes place after any merge:<br />

a. ?P<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

6 Notice that the direct object does not need to move over the verb because the verb is given as well.<br />

48


. vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

V ?P<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

Even though we cannot decide among the three hypotheses by looking at the example<br />

in (12), the hypotheses make different predictions that can distinguish among them. <strong>The</strong><br />

first prediction concerns the position <strong>of</strong> the main verb. I have already mentioned in 1.4 that<br />

in Czech the main verb obligatory moves out <strong>of</strong> VP in the present and the past tense but<br />

not in the future tense (cf. Veselovská 2004; Kučerová 2005). Thus, if G-movement takes<br />

place at the end <strong>of</strong> the phase or at the end <strong>of</strong> VP, the main verb in the future tense should<br />

follow the direct object. In contrast, if G-movement takes place after any merge, the verb<br />

is expected to be able to precede the direct object. <strong>The</strong> relevant structures are schematized<br />

in (16).<br />

(16) Different predictions for the position <strong>of</strong> the main verb in Future:<br />

a. [ ?P DO [ vP subject v [ V P verb IO t DO ] ] ] ←− end <strong>of</strong> phase<br />

b. [ vP subject v [ ?P DO [ V P verb IO t DO ] ] ] ←− maximal projection<br />

c. [ vP subject v [ V P verb [ ?P DO [ V P IO t DO ] ] ] ] ←− any merge<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (17) show that only the hypothesis that G-movement takes place after<br />

any merge makes the right prediction. 7 <strong>The</strong> example in (17-b), predicted by the two other<br />

theories, is a plausible answer to the question What will Mary do with the horse?, i.e., it is<br />

felicitous in a situation in which both the verb and the indirect object are new, but it cannot<br />

be used when only the indirect object is new.<br />

(17) Whom will Mary give a horse?<br />

a. Marie bude [ V P dávat koně || Pavlovi].<br />

Marie.Nom will give horse.Acc Pavel.Dat<br />

b. #Marie bude koně dávat || Pavlovi.<br />

Marie.Nom will horse.Acc give Pavel.Dat<br />

7 <strong>The</strong> sentences in (17) may sound slightly awkward to a native speaker. <strong>The</strong> reason is that in order to keep<br />

minimal pairs I use an iterative form <strong>of</strong> verb ‘give’ that is perfective. This is necessary because the basic root<br />

does not have a periphrastic future. See also ftn. (41) in chapter 1, concerning the same issue.<br />

49


‘Marie will give the/a horse to Pavel.’<br />

Furthermore, the three hypotheses make different predictions with respect to the distribution<br />

<strong>of</strong> adverbs. I assume that adverbs in Czech, with the exception <strong>of</strong> prosodically heavy<br />

adverbs, are left branching and adjoin immediately to a functional head. Thus, for example<br />

a vP adverb can linearly intervene between the subject and the finite verb in v. 8 Consider<br />

the examples in (18). Time adverbials, such as yesterday, that are base generated at vP may<br />

precede the finite verb and both the direct and indirect object, irrespective <strong>of</strong> the word order<br />

<strong>of</strong> the objects. If G-movement <strong>of</strong> the direct object took place only at the phase level, this<br />

order would be unexpected without additional assumptions about movement <strong>of</strong> adverbs.<br />

Thus, we can conclude that the reordering <strong>of</strong> the direct and indirect object takes place<br />

within vP.<br />

(18) vP adverbs:<br />

a. Marie [ vP včera dala Petrovi<br />

Marie.Nom yesterday gave to-Peter.Dat<br />

‘Marie gave yesterday Peter a horse.’<br />

b. Marie [ vP včera dala koně<br />

Marie.Nom yesterday gave horse.Acc<br />

‘Marie gave yesterday a horse to Pavel.’<br />

koně].<br />

horse.Acc<br />

Pavlovi].<br />

Pavel.Dat<br />

We can further restrict the domain <strong>of</strong> the reordering by looking at VP adverbs. Assuming<br />

that VP adverbs adjoin to VP, we predict that if G-movement targets the end <strong>of</strong> the maximal<br />

projection, the direct object should precede the adverb. If, on the other hand, G-movement<br />

takes place within VP, there is no problem with the adverb preceding the direct object. As<br />

we can see in (19), a manner adverb rychle ‘quickly’ may indeed precede the direct object.<br />

(19) VP adverbs:<br />

a. Marie dala [ V P rychle Petrovi<br />

Marie.Nom gave quickly to-Peter.Dat<br />

‘Marie gave quickly Peter a horse.’<br />

b. Marie dala [ V P rychle koně<br />

Marie.Nom gave quickly horse.Acc<br />

‘Marie gave quickly a horse to Pavel.’<br />

koně].<br />

horse.Acc<br />

|| Pavlovi].<br />

Pavel.Dat<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (20) are here as a control showing that the reordering with respect to the<br />

VP adverb takes place within VP. Thus the only way we can derive the examples in (20)<br />

with our current assumptions is to assume that G-movement takes place after any merge.<br />

<strong>The</strong> derivation <strong>of</strong> (20-b) is schematized in (21). <strong>The</strong> only new element – the indirect object<br />

– is marked by a box.<br />

(20) vP and VP adverbs:<br />

a. Marie [ vP včera dala [ V P rychle Petrovi koně]].<br />

Marie.Nom yesterday gave quickly to-Peter.Dat horse.Acc<br />

‘Marie gave yesterday quickly Peter a horse.’<br />

8 For a detailed discussion <strong>of</strong> adverbial syntax in Czech, see, for example, Biskup (In preparation).<br />

50


. Marie [ vP včera dala [ V P rychle koně<br />

Marie.Nom yesterday gave quickly horse.Acc<br />

‘Marie gave yesterday quickly a horse to Pavel.’<br />

|| Pavlovi]].<br />

Pavel.Dat<br />

(21) a. VP is built and the DO undergoes G-movement above the IO:<br />

?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

gave<br />

t horse<br />

b. V moves within the VP shell:<br />

VP<br />

gave ?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

horse<br />

c. the VP adverb is merged:<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

gave ?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

d. the verb moves to v:<br />

t gave<br />

horse<br />

51


vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

t gave ?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

t gave<br />

horse<br />

e. the vP adverb is merged:<br />

vP<br />

yesterday<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

t gave ?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

f. the subject is merged:<br />

t gave<br />

horse<br />

52


vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

yesterday<br />

vP<br />

gave<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

t gave ?P<br />

horse<br />

VP<br />

Pavel<br />

VP<br />

<strong>The</strong> argument as it stands now is not conclusive. First <strong>of</strong> all, if we assumed that a<br />

ditransitive verb does not have a VP shell but there are instead two independent heads<br />

involved (cf. for example, Pylkkänen (2002) and the literature cited there), the hypothesis<br />

that G-movement takes place at the end <strong>of</strong> a maximal projection would still be feasible.<br />

Similarly, if we assumed that adverbs form their own functional projections, we could not<br />

distinguish between the two hypotheses. A crucial piece <strong>of</strong> evidence that G-movement may<br />

take place after any merge comes from SOV orders. Consider the example in (22).<br />

(22) a. How did the boy get the lollipop?<br />

b. Chlapec lízátko<br />

boy.Nom lollipop.Acc<br />

|| našel.<br />

found<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> boy found the lollipop.’<br />

In this case, the subject and the object are given and only the verb is new. Since the verb<br />

needs to move to v, there must be an option for the object to move over the verb before the<br />

subject is merged. If the object moved at the end <strong>of</strong> the vP projection, it should linearly<br />

precede the subject, resulting in OSV order. As the example in (22) shows, this prediction<br />

is incorrect. <strong>The</strong> corresponding derivation is given in (23). <strong>The</strong> given elements are marked<br />

by boxes.<br />

t gave<br />

horse<br />

(23) a. v is merged:<br />

53


vP<br />

found<br />

VP<br />

lollipop<br />

VP<br />

t found<br />

t lollipop<br />

b. the object moves:<br />

vP<br />

lollipop<br />

vP<br />

found<br />

VP<br />

t lollipop<br />

VP<br />

t found<br />

t lollipop<br />

c. the subject is merged:<br />

vP<br />

boy<br />

vP<br />

lollipop<br />

vP<br />

found<br />

VP<br />

t lollipop<br />

VP<br />

t found<br />

t lollipop<br />

<strong>The</strong> conclusion that G-movement takes place after any merge, <strong>of</strong> course, follows only<br />

under the assumption that the object cannot tuck in under the subject (Richards, 1997). I do<br />

not adopt this theoretical option here for two reasons. First, as we will see in chapter 3, it is<br />

not always the case that if more than one given element moves, that the elements end up in<br />

the same order. If we allowed tucking in, we would have to further restrict its application<br />

only to a limited number <strong>of</strong> cases. Furthermore, tucking in in Czech always comes with a<br />

special semantic interpretation. For example, in Czech (as well as in Russian and Polish), if<br />

multiple wh-movement obeys superiority, the only possible answer is an answer with a pair<br />

54


list reading. No such requirement exists for cases in which wh-elements move on nested<br />

paths (see Meyer (2003, 2004) for more details). Consider the following examples.<br />

(24) (Meyer, 2003, ex. (5))<br />

a. After the film ‘Four weddings and a funeral’, Petr once more enumerated. . .<br />

b. kdo si koho vzal na těch čtyřech svatbách.<br />

who.Nom REFL whom.Acc took on these four weddings<br />

‘married whom on the four weddings.’<br />

(25) (Meyer, 2003, ex. (6))<br />

a. <strong>The</strong>re is going to be a wedding at our church tomorrow.<br />

b. #Prosím tě, a kdo si koho bere?<br />

beg you and who.Nom REFL who.Acc takes<br />

‘Tell me who is going to marry whom.’<br />

While the subject-wh ≻ object-wh order is acceptable in the situation in (24), in which all<br />

the relevant brides and grooms have been introduced in the previous context (by watching<br />

the movie) and the speaker asks for pairs formed by these brides and grooms, the same<br />

order is not felicitous in the dialog in (25), in which the participants <strong>of</strong> the wedding are<br />

unknown to the speaker. On the other hand, the reversed order is felicitous, as in (26).<br />

(26) a. <strong>The</strong>re is going to be a wedding at our church tomorrow.<br />

b. Prosím tě, a koho si kdo bere v tuhle<br />

beg you and who.Acc REFL who.Nom takes in this<br />

‘Who is going to get married in this time <strong>of</strong> the year?’<br />

roční<br />

year<br />

dobu?<br />

time<br />

I do not have any explanation for the relation between syntax and the semantic interpretation.<br />

I state the correlation here only as an empirical observation. But we can still use it<br />

as an argument against tucking in in other environments. In particular, I argue that tucking<br />

in is not a strategy available for G-movement. 9 My main argument is that the SOV order<br />

in (22) is not associated with any pair-list reading interpretation that we find elsewhere,<br />

for example with contrastive focus. <strong>The</strong> SOV order simply asserts that both the boy and<br />

the lollipop are given. <strong>The</strong> example could be used not only as an answer to the question<br />

in (22) but would be felicitous in the following context as well: ‘A boy was sad because<br />

he lost a lollipop that he got from his grandma. But then [the boy found the lollipop] and<br />

he was happy again.’ Thus, since the object cannot tuck in under the subject, I argue that<br />

the SOV order provides additional evidence for the hypothesis that G-movement may take<br />

place after any merge.<br />

I argue that we can generalize the lack <strong>of</strong> tucking in for G-movement. In particular, I<br />

argue for the following condition on G-movement.<br />

(27) Extension condition on G-movement:<br />

G-movement must extend the tree.<br />

9 I do not argue that there is no tucking in in syntax. My point is that in Czech multiple movement that<br />

obeys tucking in obligatorily obtains a pair-list reading interpretation.<br />

55


We can conclude that G-movement may take place after any merge. <strong>The</strong> reader might<br />

object though that so far we have seen only cases involving verbal projections. As we will<br />

see in the next section, this follows from the proposal that G-movement is parasitic on overt<br />

head movement. Since there is no overt head movement in other environments, the properties<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement in non-verbal environments cannot be directly tested. 10<br />

To conclude, I have argued in section 2.1 that in Czech there is no unique syntactic position<br />

that is interpreted as given. In this section I have made the argument even stronger,<br />

by showing that G-movement may take place after any merge, and can thus target various<br />

syntactic positions. <strong>The</strong> argument I presented here was based on the word order in ditransitive<br />

sentences – in particular, on differences in the position <strong>of</strong> the main verb with respect to<br />

the direct and the indirect object and then on the position <strong>of</strong> vP and VP adverbs with respect<br />

to the direct and the indirect object. <strong>The</strong> conclusion that G-movement may take place after<br />

any merge raises an immediate question: what exactly is the landing site <strong>of</strong> G-movement?<br />

I will address this question in the next section.<br />

2.3 <strong>The</strong> head movement restriction on G-movement<br />

In this section, I will <strong>of</strong>fer an explanation for the apparent lack <strong>of</strong> a unique landing site <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movement and for the fact that G-movement may take place after any merge. I will argue<br />

that these two properties are a result <strong>of</strong> G-movement being parasitic on head movement.<br />

I will motivate the head movement restriction on G-movement by a general condition on<br />

merge, namely, merge dependence on agree. 11<br />

In the previous section, we have seen that G-movement may take place after any merge.<br />

We have also seen, in section 1.4, that G-movement <strong>of</strong> a G-element α forces head movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> the relevant head. In the following discussion I will refer to the relevant head as<br />

the head <strong>of</strong> α.<br />

<strong>The</strong> picture that arises is the following: (i) If the G-element does not have a head<br />

that could move, then G-movement is extremely local, as in (28). (ii) If the G-element<br />

has a head that can move, G-movement can be non-local, as in (29). Notice that in both<br />

cases, after G-movement takes place, the G-element is adjacent to the verb it was originally<br />

merged with. <strong>The</strong> examples are schematized in (30).<br />

(28) a. What will happen with the refugees?<br />

b. Musíme doufat, že nějaká<br />

must.1pl to-hope that some<br />

nezisková<br />

non-pr<strong>of</strong>it<br />

organizace bude běžencům<br />

organization will refugees.Dat<br />

10 Veselovská (1998) argued that there is N-to-D movement in Czech. Her argument is based on fairly<br />

complex possessive constructions including numerals. In these constructions we can indeed find local reorderings.<br />

Unfortunately, I have not figured yet how to control for the involved information structure. I leave<br />

the nominal cases for future research.<br />

11 For concreteness I am assuming the general framework <strong>of</strong> Chomsky (2000, 2001, 2005). As far as I can<br />

tell nothing much in the current proposal hinges on this choice, but I will not attempt here to explore the<br />

compatibility <strong>of</strong> the proposal with alternative frameworks.<br />

56


poskytovat jídlo.<br />

provide food.Acc<br />

‘We must hope that some non-pr<strong>of</strong>it organization will provide the refugees<br />

with food.’<br />

(29) a. What happened with the refugees?<br />

b. Slyšel jsem, že běžencům<br />

heard Aux.1sg that refugees<br />

organizace jídlo .<br />

food.Acc<br />

poskytla<br />

provided<br />

(nakonec) nějaká nezisková<br />

in-the-end non-pr<strong>of</strong>it organization<br />

‘I heard that the refugees were provided with food by some non-benefit organization.’<br />

(30) Dependence <strong>of</strong> G-movement on head movement:<br />

a. organization will refugees provide with food<br />

b. refugees provided organization with food<br />

In order to account for the adjacency restriction observed in (28) and (29) (and in previous<br />

examples in section 1.4), I will tie the adjacency requirement to independent properties<br />

<strong>of</strong> agree and merge. In particular, I will follow Sigurðsson (2004) and Pesetsky and Torrego<br />

(2006) in the proposal that any merge is preconditioned by agree, i.e., for merge to<br />

take place, there must be feature matching involved. 12,13<br />

(31) Agree Condition On Merge (Sigurðsson, 2004, ex. (11))<br />

Two objects or elements, X and Y, may be merged only if the relation <strong>of</strong> Agree<br />

holds between them.<br />

I propose that the Agree Condition on Merge corresponds to two different feature configurations.<br />

For an element α to move, there must be either (i) an externally merged element<br />

β that brings new features into the derivation to be matched and/or valued; or (ii) α must<br />

be re-merged within a projection that contain the head in which projection α was base generated.<br />

It is the second case that interests us here. I argue that G-movement is this kind<br />

<strong>of</strong> merge and that the head movement restriction on G-movement reflects such a feature<br />

matching requirement. <strong>The</strong> head movement condition on G-movement is repeated below<br />

as (32).<br />

(32) Head movement restriction on G-movement:<br />

12 <strong>The</strong> idea that external merge is feature-driven is not new. For example, Svenonius (1994); Collins (2002);<br />

Adger (2003); Heck and Müller (2006) formulated such an idea in connection with subcategorization features.<br />

13 <strong>The</strong> formulation <strong>of</strong> the conditon in Pesetsky and Torrego (2006) is the following:<br />

(i) Vehicle requirement on Merge (VRM) (Pesetsky and Torrego, 2006, ex, (1))<br />

If α and β merge, some feature F <strong>of</strong> α must probe F on β.<br />

57


α G can G-move out <strong>of</strong> XP only if X 0 moves out <strong>of</strong> XP as well.<br />

Thus, I argue that the head movement condition understood as a form <strong>of</strong> parasitic relation<br />

(instead <strong>of</strong> new feature evaluation, use an already existing feature set) is a way to<br />

create a landing site in case there is no externally merged probe available. In other words,<br />

while in the case <strong>of</strong> feature-driven movement, there is probe P that creates a new sisterhood<br />

relation (P lands itself as the landing site), in case <strong>of</strong> G-movement, there is no Probe and<br />

re-merge is possible only if an existing feature-matching set is reused.<br />

A consequence <strong>of</strong> this assumption is that a given element α must be remerged within<br />

the same projection to which α’s head moves. We can thus strengthen the condition on the<br />

head movement, as in (33).<br />

(33) Head movement restriction on G-movement [final]:<br />

a. α G can G-move out <strong>of</strong> XP only if X 0 moves out <strong>of</strong> XP as well.<br />

b. If α G G-moved out <strong>of</strong> XP, α G may G-move to YP only if X 0 moves to YP as<br />

well.<br />

Another consequence <strong>of</strong> the feature matching requirement is that G-movement can take<br />

place after any merge because it is not dependent on introducing new features into the<br />

derivation. <strong>The</strong>re is no need for G-movement to be feature driven. 14 Furthermore, since<br />

head movement is very local, G-movement must be local as well.<br />

Notice that there are three distinct configurations when G-movement <strong>of</strong> α can arise: (i)<br />

the head <strong>of</strong> α is in its base generated position, as in (34); (ii) the head <strong>of</strong> α has undergone G-<br />

movement, as in (35); (iii) the head <strong>of</strong> α underwent an independently motivated movement,<br />

as in (36).<br />

(34) Case (i): the sister <strong>of</strong> α is in its base generated position:<br />

X<br />

α<br />

X<br />

X<br />

α<br />

(35) Case (ii): the sister <strong>of</strong> α undergoes G-movement:<br />

14 I will spell-out how exactly G-movement is driven in chapter 4. For the current discussion it is immaterial<br />

whether G-movement is feature driven or is not. Notice though that if G-movement is not feature driven,<br />

the proposal is still compatible with the phasal theory <strong>of</strong> Chomsky (2004b, 2005). Chomsky proposes that<br />

a feature-driven operation may take place only at the phasal level because it is only the phasal head that<br />

introduces the relevant feature(s) into the derivation. If G-movement is not feature driven, there is no reason<br />

to wait for the phase to be completed. G-movement may take place at any point.<br />

58


a. X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

Z<br />

X<br />

X<br />

α<br />

b. X<br />

α<br />

X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

Z<br />

X<br />

X<br />

α<br />

(36) Case (iii): the sister <strong>of</strong> α undergoes feature-driven movement:<br />

a. X<br />

X<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

X<br />

X<br />

α<br />

b. X<br />

α<br />

X<br />

X<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

X<br />

X<br />

α<br />

We have already seen examples <strong>of</strong> all three configurations. Case (i) is a case <strong>of</strong> an object<br />

moving locally around an infinitive, as in (37). Case (ii) corresponds to an OVS order if<br />

59


oth the verb and the object are given, as in (38). Case (iii) demands, however, a more<br />

careful discussion.<br />

(37) Example <strong>of</strong> Case (i):<br />

a. Pavel hasn’t come back home yet, right? Do you know what they plan to do?<br />

b. Někdo snad bude Pavla hledat t Pavel .<br />

someone.Nom hopefully will Pavel.Acc look-for<br />

c. [ V P Pavel look-for Pavel ]<br />

(38) Example <strong>of</strong> Case (ii):<br />

a. Who ate the lollipop?<br />

b. Lízátko snědla || Maruška t snědla t lízatko .<br />

lollipop.Acc ate Maruška.Nom<br />

‘Maruška ate the lollipop’<br />

c. [ vP lollipop ate Maruška t v−V [ V P t V t lollipop ] ]<br />

Notice that already the example in (38) is a case <strong>of</strong> a combination <strong>of</strong> independent movements<br />

(V-to-v movement), i.e., an instance <strong>of</strong> Case (iii). Since both the verb and the object<br />

are given, there is no need for G-movement within VP. It is only after V moves to v and the<br />

subject is merged, when the need for G-movement arises. At this point, both the verb and<br />

the object undergo G-movement but only the object moves from its base generated position.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is one more instance <strong>of</strong> movement <strong>of</strong> the head <strong>of</strong> α that is relevant for our current<br />

discussion. This is a case <strong>of</strong> head movement that happens in order to facilitate G-movement<br />

(compare the discussion <strong>of</strong> (32) in section 1.3). A typical example is verb head movement<br />

in an OVS where only the object is given and the verb and the subject are new. See example<br />

(32) from section 1.3, repeated below as (39).<br />

(39) a. And what about the lollipop?<br />

b. Lízátko || našla malá holčička.<br />

lollipop.Acc found little girl.Nom<br />

‘A little girl found the lollipop.’<br />

c. [ vP lollipop found little girl t v−V [ ?P t V t lollipop ] ]<br />

Even though the derivation in (39-c) is reminiscent <strong>of</strong> the derivation in (38-c), the motivation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the final verb movement seems to be rather different. I want to suggest that the<br />

difference between head movement as an instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement and head movement as<br />

a way to facilitate G-movement does not have any reflex in the syntax.<br />

I propose that in both cases, i.e., both in OV||S and O||VS, the observed verb movement<br />

is an instance <strong>of</strong> v-to-T movement. We have already seen that a finite verb in Czech does<br />

not need to move overtly higher than v (in section 2.2). On the other hand, it is a plausible<br />

assumption that there is Agree between T and v. I suggest that a verbal head may use the<br />

60


existing Agree relation in case it allows an instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement. Furthermore, such<br />

a head must use an existing Agree relation instead <strong>of</strong> extending or creating a projection.<br />

Notice that this is a reversed side <strong>of</strong> the head movement restriction on G-movement. A<br />

given XP can take a free ride on its head in the sense that it can use a set <strong>of</strong> existing<br />

matching features with the head. But a head itself does not have such an option. For a head<br />

to G-move, the head must enter into a new feature checking relation. v-to-T movement is<br />

exactly such a case.<br />

(40) v-to-T Movement in Czech<br />

v-to-T movement in Czech takes place iff it changes the semantic interpretation.<br />

(41) Restriction on overt head movement<br />

If a head moves as an instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement or in order to facilitate G-movement,<br />

the head must use an independently existing Agree relation.<br />

Since there is no obligatory v-to-T movement in Czech, I argue that such movement is<br />

possible only if it gives rise to a new semantic interpretation. We will see in chapter 4 that<br />

we can unify the two types <strong>of</strong> head movement – head movement which is G-movement<br />

and head movement that facilitates G-movement – even further. <strong>The</strong> point will be that the<br />

purpose <strong>of</strong> any G-movement is to create a syntactic configuration that allows an element α<br />

to be interpreted as given in case α would not be otherwise interpreted as given. Whether<br />

the element that G-moves is given or new will turn out to be immaterial.<br />

With the assumption that v moves to T both in case the verb undergoes G-movement<br />

and in case head movement <strong>of</strong> the verb facilitates G-movement, the derivation <strong>of</strong> O||VS and<br />

OV||S becomes identical. 15 It is only up to the semantic interface to decide on which side<br />

<strong>of</strong> the partition the verb is. <strong>The</strong> corresponding derivation is given in (42).<br />

(42) Derivation <strong>of</strong> OVS order:<br />

a. vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

object<br />

15 This is not entirely correct. If the object is presupposed and the verb is new, the object would move over<br />

the verb already in VP. I put this detail aside.<br />

61


. TP<br />

object<br />

TP<br />

T-v-V<br />

vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

t v−V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t object<br />

<strong>The</strong> alert reader has already noticed that the derivation given above follows only if we assume<br />

that the object cannot G-move above the subject without the verb moving as well.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is nothing in the head movement restriction on G-movement that would block a<br />

derivation in which the object would move above the subject within vP. As we will see in<br />

chapter 3, there is also no problem with having more than one element preceding the verb<br />

(if all the elements are given). Why then must the verb move?<br />

I want to suggest that it is an independent property <strong>of</strong> specifiers (subjects) that nothing<br />

can be merged within XP once the subject is merged in Spec,XP. At this point I do not have<br />

any explanation <strong>of</strong> this fact but it seems to be true for Czech. (Recall that, for example,<br />

adverbs are merged between the subject and the finite verb, unlike in English.) Thus, once<br />

a subject (Spec,XP) is merged, no further element can be (re-)merged within XP. For an<br />

element to be re-merged, a new head must be merged. It follows that if α needs to be G-<br />

moved within XP, it must be done before Spec,XP is merged. Once Spec,XP is merged, α<br />

can G-move only if X moves to a higher head. 16<br />

In this section, I have <strong>of</strong>fered an explanation for the head movement restriction on G-<br />

movement. <strong>The</strong> basic idea <strong>of</strong> this condition was that two elements can be re-merged if the<br />

new merge relation preserves the feature matching set <strong>of</strong> the original merge relation. This<br />

condition has been introduced in order to account for the fact that G-movement is restricted<br />

by overt movement <strong>of</strong> its sister and that G-movement may take place after any merge. It<br />

follows that G-movement is not tied to a particular syntactic position. <strong>The</strong> only restriction<br />

is that a given element may be re-merged only in the same projection as its head. I have also<br />

addressed the question <strong>of</strong> when and where a head moves in order to facilitate G-movement.<br />

16 I crucially assume that head movement cannot extend a phrase. For a proposal suggesting that head<br />

movement leads to phase extension see den Dikken (To Appear).<br />

62


2.4 Summary<br />

In this chapter, I have addressed the question <strong>of</strong> what kind <strong>of</strong> movement G-movement is. In<br />

particular, I have looked closely at the following three questions: (i) what is the syntactic<br />

target <strong>of</strong> G-movement? (ii) at what point <strong>of</strong> the derivation does G-movement take place?<br />

and (iii) what kind <strong>of</strong> syntactic operation is G-movement?<br />

In section 2.1, I showed that Czech has no unique syntactic position that is always interpreted<br />

as given. In the next section, section 2.2, I provided further evidence in favor<br />

<strong>of</strong> this claim by showing that G-movement may take place after any merge. I explained<br />

these properties <strong>of</strong> G-movement by tying them to the observation that G-movement <strong>of</strong> α is<br />

restricted by the head movement possibilities <strong>of</strong> the head <strong>of</strong> α. In section 2.3, I suggested<br />

that an element α can move without a feature trigger if the new merge relation contains<br />

the feature matching set <strong>of</strong> the original merge relation and if the new structure affects the<br />

semantic interpretation.<br />

In the next chapter, I will refine the system in place by looking at more complex derivations<br />

that contain several instances <strong>of</strong> G-movement. In particular, I will look at utterances<br />

where more than one element can precede the verbal partition. I will show that these strings<br />

can be derived by several instances <strong>of</strong> movement or they can be derived by phrasal movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> a whole subtree. <strong>The</strong> combination <strong>of</strong> these two strategies will allow us to capture<br />

various word order combinations found in Czech.<br />

63


Chapter 3<br />

Complex Word Order Patterns<br />

So far we have considered only simple cases <strong>of</strong> G-movement, i.e., cases where only one<br />

given element undergoes G-movement. In this chapter I will closely examine more complex<br />

cases, i.e., cases where there is more than one given element undergoing G-movement.<br />

<strong>The</strong> question is whether the relatively simple tools we have developed so far can account<br />

for the complex word order data in Czech. I will argue that G-movement and independent<br />

restrictions in the Czech syntax are indeed all we need.<br />

First, I will investigate the relative position <strong>of</strong> the relevant verbal head with respect to<br />

given elements. We will see that the relevant verbal head always follows all the given elements.<br />

Thus, the verbal head marks the partition between given and new. 1 In section 3.1, I<br />

will address the verb partition generalization in the context <strong>of</strong> the head movement restriction<br />

on G-movement. We will see that the verbal partition follows from this restriction.<br />

In section 3.2, I will look closely at cases where there is more than one given element<br />

that needs to undergo G-movement. I will argue that multiple given elements either (i)<br />

move in separate instances <strong>of</strong> G-movement, or (ii) there is a constituent dominating several<br />

given elements and the costituent moves. <strong>The</strong>n I will address the question <strong>of</strong> when<br />

several given elements may move as one constituent dominating several given elements. I<br />

will argue that several given elements can move as one constituent only if (i) the smallest<br />

constituent dominating them can independently move, and (ii) the constituent contains only<br />

given elements. If these two conditions are not satisfied, given elements must undergo individual<br />

G-movement. As we will see, these two types <strong>of</strong> movement – one constituent versus<br />

several separate movements – result in different word orders. If given elements move as<br />

one constituent, their relative word order is preserved, if they move separately, their relative<br />

word order is reversed. I will argue that it is a combination <strong>of</strong> these two moving strategies<br />

(plus base generation) which derives the variety <strong>of</strong> word order patterns found in Czech.<br />

Thus, G-movement will turn out to be a sufficient tool for the Czech data.<br />

1 According to Zikánová (2006), in the Prague Dependency Corpus, version 2.0, 92,35 percent <strong>of</strong> finite<br />

verbs creates the partition between ‘theme’ and ‘rheme’. <strong>The</strong> distinction between theme and rheme roughly<br />

corresponds to our distinction between given and new. Zikánová does not provide further characteristics <strong>of</strong><br />

the Modern Czech data (her work concentrates on older stages <strong>of</strong> Czech).<br />

64


3.1 Deriving the verb partition<br />

In this section I will investigate the relation between the position <strong>of</strong> the finite verb and the<br />

partition between given and new. We will see that if more than one element precedes the<br />

verb, the pre-verbal elements must be given. 2 I will argue that this is a result <strong>of</strong> the head<br />

movement condition on G-movement, repeated in (1).<br />

(1) Head movement restriction on G-movement [final]:<br />

a. α G can G-move out <strong>of</strong> XP only if X 0 moves out <strong>of</strong> XP as well.<br />

b. If α G G-moved out <strong>of</strong> XP, α G may G-move to YP only if X 0 moves to YP as<br />

well.<br />

In other words, a given element may move only if it is remerged within a projection in<br />

which its head is remerged. This follows from our assumption about conditions on merge<br />

from section 2.3. Furthermore, if more than one given element moves and the elements<br />

belong to the same head, they must all be remerged within the same projection. <strong>The</strong> next<br />

section will investigate consequences <strong>of</strong> this assumption and will look closely at derivations<br />

containing more than one G-movement per time.<br />

Consider first ditransitive constructions where only one <strong>of</strong> the objects is given and the<br />

rest <strong>of</strong> the clause is new. So far we have only seen that such an object can undergo short<br />

movement (in section 1.4) but we have not seen how far the object can move and where<br />

the verb is. As we can see in (2)–(3), the object must be the leftmost element and the finite<br />

verb must immediately follow the fronted object. <strong>The</strong> examples in (4)–(5) exemplify the<br />

pattern.<br />

(2) a. DO-G V S IO<br />

b. #DO-G S V IO<br />

c. #DO-G S IO DO-G S V IO<br />

(3) a. IO-G V S DO<br />

b. #IO-G S V DO<br />

c. #IO-G S DO V<br />

(4) What happened to the new chair you got from Mary? I haven’t seen it around.<br />

a. Tu novou židli || dala naše uklízečka<br />

své známé.<br />

that new chair.Acc gave our cleaning-woman.Nom REFL friend.Dat<br />

b. #Tu novou židli || naše uklízečka<br />

dala své známé.<br />

that new chair.Acc our cleaning-woman.Nom gave REFL friend.Dat<br />

c. #Tu novou židli || naše uklízečka<br />

své známé dala.<br />

that new chair.Acc our cleaning-woman.Nom REFL friend.Dat gave<br />

‘Our cleaning woman gave the chair to her friend.’<br />

(5) Do you know what happened to Pavel?<br />

a. Pavlovi || dala jeho maminka kytaru.<br />

Pavel.Dat gave his mother.Nom guitar.Acc<br />

2 This generalization in fact covers also contrastive elements because they are given as well.<br />

65


. #Pavlovi || jeho maminka dala kytaru.<br />

Pavel.Dat his mother.Nom gave guitar.Acc<br />

c. #Pavlovi || jeho maminka kytaru dala.<br />

Pavel.Dat his mother.Nom guitar.Acc gave<br />

‘Pavel’s mother gave him a guitar.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern observed in (2)–(3) is not a result <strong>of</strong> a V2 requirement. As we can see in (6)<br />

and (7), 3 for the direct object case, and in (8) and (9), for the indirect object case, there is<br />

nothing inherently wrong with the finite verb being in a different position. But the position<br />

is crucially dependent on the relevant context. In all the examples, the finite verb must<br />

immediately follow all <strong>of</strong> the given elements.<br />

(6) Do you know what our cleaning lady did with the new chair we got from Mary?<br />

a. Tu novou židli naše uklízečka<br />

|| dala své známé.<br />

that new chair.Acc our cleaning-woman.Nom gave REFL friend.Dat<br />

‘Our cleaning woman gave the chair to her friend.’<br />

(7) I have heard that a friend <strong>of</strong> your cleaning lady stole from her the new chair? Is it<br />

true?<br />

a. Naše uklízečka<br />

své známé tu novou židli || dala.<br />

our cleaning-woman.Nom REFL friend.Dat that new chair.Acc gave<br />

‘(No, that’s not true.) Our cleaning woman GAVE the chair to her friend.’<br />

(8) Do you know what Pavel’s mam did to him that he is now so happy?<br />

a. Maminka Pavlovi || dala kytaru.<br />

mother.Nom Pavel.Dat gave guitar.Acc<br />

‘Pavel’s mother gave him a guitar.’<br />

(9) Is it true that Pavel was forced by his mam to buy a quitar from his pocket money?<br />

a. Maminka Pavlovi kytaru || dala.<br />

Pavel.Dat mother.Nom guitar.Acc gave<br />

‘(No.) Pavel got a guitar from his mum. (He did not need to buy it from his<br />

pocket money.)’<br />

<strong>The</strong> above examples exemplify the fact that the finite verb behaves as a partition between<br />

given and new. <strong>The</strong> question is how exactly we can explain the relation between the position<br />

<strong>of</strong> the finite verb and the partition between given and new. <strong>The</strong>re are two logical<br />

options: either (i) the given elements move to separate projections above the projection<br />

<strong>of</strong> the finite verb, or (ii) the given elements are adjoined to the same head. It follows<br />

from our new definition <strong>of</strong> the head movement constraint and the extension condition on<br />

G-movement that all given elements must be adjoined to the projection hosting the finite<br />

verb.<br />

3 <strong>The</strong> examples in (6) and (7) have a different word order <strong>of</strong> the arguments than the examples in (4). <strong>The</strong><br />

word order difference is irrelevant for the argument: the same orders as in (4) are grammatical if contrastive<br />

focus was involved. I simplify the case here to stay only in the domain <strong>of</strong> G-movement.<br />

66


We will see in the next section how the system works. In the rest <strong>of</strong> this section, I will<br />

continue looking at simple examples that we have not considered so far. <strong>The</strong> examples will<br />

serve as background for the coming discussion <strong>of</strong> more complex cases. Consider again<br />

the example in (4), i.e., a structure in which only the direct object is given. <strong>The</strong> predicted<br />

derivation proceeds as follows. First, the direct object needs to move at the VP level because<br />

it is asymmetrically commanded by the new verb, (10-a). <strong>The</strong>n the new indirect<br />

object is merged and the direct object moves above it, (10-b). Now the verb moves and the<br />

direct object moves again, (10-c). In the next step, the verb undergoes V-to-v movement<br />

and the direct object is free to move before the subject is merged, (10-d).<br />

In the next step, the subject is merged as the specifier, (10-e). At this point the direct<br />

object is again asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element (the subject). But the direct<br />

object cannot move at this point. This follows from our assumption discussed in section<br />

2.3 that nothing can be merged within XP after a subject was merged as a specifier <strong>of</strong> XP.<br />

Thus, the only way the derivation can proceed is if the verb moves first to T. Only then is<br />

the direct object free to G-move again, as in (10-f).<br />

(10) Derivation <strong>of</strong> DO-G V S IO<br />

a. VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

t DO<br />

b. VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

V t DO<br />

67


c. VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

d. vP<br />

DO<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

v<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

68


e. vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

DO<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

v<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

f. TP<br />

DO<br />

TP<br />

T-v-V<br />

vP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

v<br />

VP<br />

v<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

t DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

So far so good. Let’s now look at a derivation <strong>of</strong> a clause where both the subject and<br />

the direct object are given, as in (6). <strong>The</strong> final word order is S-DO-V-IO. <strong>The</strong> first steps <strong>of</strong><br />

the derivation are identical with (10-a)–(10-d). What happens after the subject is merged,<br />

69


(10-e)? At this point all needs <strong>of</strong> the given elements are satisfied, i.e., there is no given element<br />

that would be asymmetrically c-commanded by a non-presupposed element. Thus,<br />

from the point <strong>of</strong> view <strong>of</strong> G-movement, the derivation is complete. 4<br />

Even though the example in (4) contains two given elements, the derivation proceeds<br />

without any interesting interaction between them. <strong>The</strong> reason is that only one given element<br />

undergoes G-movement. In the next section, I will look closely at cases where more than<br />

one given element G-moves at the same point in the derivation. Two questions will be at<br />

the center <strong>of</strong> our discussion: (i) in what order G-movement <strong>of</strong> more than one element takes<br />

place, and (ii) if a constituent contains more than one given element, can the constituent<br />

move in one step, or do the elements need to undergo separate movements?<br />

3.2 Multiple G-movement<br />

This section looks at cases where more than one given element undergoes G-movement.<br />

We will see that if there is a constituent that dominates more than one given element, it<br />

is preferable to G-move the whole constituent than to G-move each element separately.<br />

Sometimes, however, there is no such constituent that could G-move. I will here investigate<br />

under what conditions more than one given element moves as a single constituent.<br />

<strong>The</strong>n I will address the question <strong>of</strong> how given elements move if they must undergo separate<br />

G-movements.<br />

Let’s first look again at example (7), repeated below as (11). <strong>The</strong> example differs from<br />

the examples that we have seen so far in that it is both the direct object and the indirect<br />

object that must G-move over the verb (recall that the verb must independently move to v,<br />

thus both the objects end up being asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element). <strong>The</strong><br />

crucial question is how exactly the two objects, marked by square brackets, move above<br />

the verb.<br />

(11) I have heard that a friend <strong>of</strong> your cleaning lady stole the new chair from her? Is it<br />

true?<br />

a. Naše uklízečka<br />

[své známé] [tu novou židli] || dala.<br />

our cleaning-woman.Nom REFL friend.Dat that new chair.Acc gave<br />

‘(No, that’s not true.) Our cleaning woman GAVE the chair to her friend.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> question is whether (i) the two objects move as one constituent, or (ii) whether they<br />

move separately. I will adopt here the former option, arguing that G-movement is as economical<br />

as possible. What I mean by that is that if it is possible to move several given<br />

elements as one constituent, then such movement is preferred to moving them separately.<br />

<strong>The</strong> condition is stated in (12). With such a condition in place, we need to ask under what<br />

conditions more than one given element may move as one constituent.<br />

(12) Minimize instances <strong>of</strong> G-movement<br />

4 <strong>The</strong> derivation continues by merging T and attracting the subject, i.e., the closest element, to Spec,TP.<br />

70


If more than one given element may move as one constituent, then such given<br />

elements must move as one constituent.<br />

Let’s go step by step through the derivation <strong>of</strong> (11). First, the direct object undergoes short<br />

G-movement over V, as in (13-a). Next, the indirect object is merged and V moves, (13-b).<br />

At this point, both the direct and indirect object need to move. I argue that they move as<br />

one constituent. Thus, it is the whole sister <strong>of</strong> V – the complement – that undergoes G-<br />

movement at once, as in (13-c). In the next step, V moves to v and the phrase containing<br />

both the direct and indirect object G-moves again. Finally, the subject is merged, (13-d).<br />

(13) a. VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

DO<br />

b. VP<br />

V<br />

VP<br />

IO<br />

VP<br />

DO<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t DO<br />

c. VP<br />

VP<br />

IO DO t V t DO<br />

VP<br />

V t V P<br />

71


d. vP<br />

subject<br />

vP<br />

VP<br />

vP<br />

IO DO t V t DO<br />

v-V<br />

t V P<br />

VP<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t V P<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is, however, a worry that arises about the proposed derivation: If a remnant<br />

phrase may undergo G-movement, why can remnant movement not improve a derivation in<br />

which a given element ends up c-commanded by a new element because <strong>of</strong> the head movement<br />

constraint? 5 Consider example (16) from section 1.4, repeated below as (14). In this<br />

example, the object ‘that book’ is asymmetrically c-commanded by two given elements.<br />

Further G-movement <strong>of</strong> the object is, however, blocked by the head movement constraint.<br />

One could imagine a derivation in which the whole VP would move after the direct object<br />

undergoes short G-movement, as in (15). If such movement took place, the given object<br />

would not be asymmetrically c-commanded by any new element anymore. Thus, the partition<br />

between given and new would be perfect. Notice that the constituent that would<br />

undergo G-movement is a complement <strong>of</strong> the verbal head. Since complements may in general<br />

undergo movement, the derivation would be compatible with our assumptions about<br />

the Czech syntax and about G-movement.<br />

(14) a. What will happen to the book?<br />

b. Marie bude tu knihu dávat Petrovi.<br />

Marie.Nom will the book.Acc give.Inf Petr.Dat<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

(15) a. What will happen to the book?<br />

b. #[Tu knihu || dávat Petrovi] bude Marie.<br />

the book.Acc give.Inf Petr.Dat will Marie.Nom<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

5 I thank Danny Fox for raising up this question.<br />

72


c. TP<br />

VP<br />

book give to-Peter t book<br />

will<br />

TP<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

t V P<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is currently nothing in our system that would rule out the derivation in (15). In chapter<br />

4, I will argue that such movement would not be licensed by the semantic component.<br />

As we will see, G-movement is licensed only if it brings in a semantic interpretation that<br />

would not otherwise be available. It will follow from our semantic system that movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> VP would not give rise to any semantic interpretation that could not be obtained from<br />

the structure without the VP movement.<br />

Before I turn to structures where several given elements cannot G-move as one constituent,<br />

I want to present two more cases in which G-movement <strong>of</strong> one constituent dominating<br />

more than one given element is attested. As we have already seen, in Czech, inflected<br />

verbal forms undergo obligatory movement to v, while an infinitive stays in situ. This difference<br />

is reflected in the word order <strong>of</strong> ditransitive sentences in case only the subject is<br />

new and everything else is given. Consider the examples in (16) and (17). While in the<br />

future tense, the main verb stays inside VP, in the past tense, the main verb evacuates VP.<br />

<strong>The</strong> result is that if the VP containing both objects undergoes G-movement in the future<br />

tense example, the objects move together with the infinitive. In contrast, in the case <strong>of</strong><br />

the past tense, it is only the remnant VP that undergoes G-movement. <strong>The</strong> corresponding<br />

structures are given in (18) and (19).<br />

(16) Future:<br />

(17) Past:<br />

a. Kdo bude dávat Fíkovi<br />

who.Nom will give.Inf Fík.Dat<br />

‘Who will give Fík presents?’<br />

b. Dávat Fíkovi dárky<br />

give.Inf Fík.Dat presents.Acc<br />

‘Ája will give Fík presents.’<br />

dárky? −→ Inf ≻ IO ≻ DO<br />

presents.Acc<br />

bude<br />

will<br />

|| Ája.<br />

Ája<br />

−→ Inf ≻ IO ≻ DO<br />

a. Kdo dával Fíkovi dárky? −→ IO ≻ DO<br />

who.Nom gave Fík.Dat presents.Acc<br />

‘Who used to give Fík presents.’<br />

b. Fíkovi dárky dávala || Ája. −→ IO ≻ DO<br />

Fík.Dat presents.Acc gave Ája.Nom<br />

‘Ája used to give Fík presents.’<br />

(18) Derivation <strong>of</strong> (16):<br />

73


TP<br />

VP<br />

TP<br />

give Fík presents<br />

will<br />

vP<br />

Ája<br />

vP<br />

t will<br />

t V P<br />

(19) Derivation <strong>of</strong> (17):<br />

TP<br />

VP<br />

TP<br />

t V Fík presents<br />

gave<br />

vtP<br />

Ája<br />

vP<br />

t gave<br />

V P<br />

Notice that it is not trivial to characterize movement <strong>of</strong> a remnant phrase dominating two<br />

given constituents as movement <strong>of</strong> a given constituent. <strong>The</strong> VP that moves in (11) is not<br />

straightforwardly given because it is the source <strong>of</strong> a new verb. As we will see in the following<br />

examples, the only property that characterizes the possible remnant phrase that can<br />

undergo G-movement is that when G-movement takes place, the phrase does not dominate<br />

any new element. Again, we will see in chapter 4 that this will also follow from the way<br />

the semantic component interprets the syntactic output.<br />

We can now turn to the question <strong>of</strong> under what conditions more than one given element<br />

cannot move as one constituent. I argue that there are two basic types <strong>of</strong> structures in which<br />

more than one given element cannot undergo G-movement as one constituent. Either (i)<br />

the constituent that dominates only given elements cannot move on independent syntactic<br />

grounds, or (ii) there is no constituent that would dominate only given elements and no new<br />

element.<br />

Let’s first look at the former case, i.e., a case where G-movement is restricted on independent<br />

syntactic grounds. A structure that we can use to test our assumptions is based on<br />

the distribution <strong>of</strong> VP and vP adverbs. In Czech, certain adverbs can be adjoined both to VP<br />

and vP. Such an adverb is the predicational modifier zase ‘again’. Consider the following<br />

examples.<br />

74


(20) a. Marie otevřela zase dveře. −→ VP adverb<br />

Marie opened again door<br />

‘Marie opened the door again.’<br />

b. Marie zase otevřela dveře. −→ vP adverb<br />

Marie again opened door<br />

‘Again, Marie opened the door.’<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is a semantic difference between the two examples. If again adjoins to VP, as in<br />

(20-a), the utterance presupposes that there was a previous event <strong>of</strong> opening the door but<br />

it might have been done by someone else than Marie. In contrast, the utterance in (20-b)<br />

presupposes that the door was opened before and it was done by Marie.<br />

<strong>The</strong> structure that interests us here is a structure in which only the subject is new and<br />

the rest <strong>of</strong> the clause (the verb, the subject and the adverb) is given. Thus, we want to know<br />

how the derivation proceeds once the new subject is merged and G-movement needs to take<br />

place. Consider the simplified structures in (21). <strong>The</strong> new subject is marked by a box.<br />

(21) a. [ vP Marie opened [ V P again t V door ]]<br />

b. [ vP Marie again opened [ V P t V door ]]<br />

After the verb moves in order to facilitate G-movement, the relevant structures are as below.<br />

(22) a. [ TP opened [ vP Marie t v [ V P again t V door ]]]<br />

b. [ TP opened [ vP Marie again t v [ V P t V door ]]]<br />

What do we expect next? <strong>The</strong> question is whether the adverb and the object can move<br />

as one constituent or whether they must move separately. We independently know that<br />

there is no problem with fronting the VP, thus we predict that the whole VP in (22-a)<br />

dominating both the adverb and the object should be able to move as one constituent. In<br />

contrast, movement <strong>of</strong> an X-bar projection is excluded on independent grounds. Since the<br />

only constituent in (22-b) which contains given elements but no new element is an X-bar<br />

projection, we predict that the given adverb and the given object must move separately. <strong>The</strong><br />

expected derivations are schematized in (23).<br />

(23) a. One instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement:<br />

again object V || subj t V t again t Obj ← ̌[ V P again t V object]<br />

b. Two instances <strong>of</strong> G-movement:<br />

obj again V || subj t again t V t Obj ← *[ vP ′ again t v [ V P t V obj]<br />

75


As we can see in the examples in (24) and (25), the predictions are borne out.<br />

(24) VP modification:<br />

a. Kdo zavřel znovu dveře? ←− Adv > Obj<br />

who closed again door<br />

‘Who closed the door again?’<br />

b. Znovu dveře zavřela || Maruška. ←− Adv > Obj<br />

again door closed Mary<br />

‘Mary closed the door again.’ [the door was closed before but it wasn’t Mary<br />

who closed it]<br />

(25) vP modification:<br />

a. Kdo znovu zavřel dveře? ←− Adv > Obj<br />

who again closed door<br />

‘Who closed the door again?’<br />

b. Dveře znovu zavřela || Maruška. ←− Obj > Adv<br />

door again closed Mary<br />

‘Again, Mary closed the door.’ [Mary closed the door before]<br />

We can repeat the same exercise with other adverbs, for example with adverbs modifying<br />

telic predicates. An example is given in (26). In English, the adverb almost is ambiguous<br />

between modifying the event <strong>of</strong> closing the door with the exclusion <strong>of</strong> the subject and<br />

between modifying the event in which the subject tries to close the door.<br />

(26) Mary almost closed the door.<br />

In Czech, the difference between the two interpretations is overtly marked on the surface by<br />

the position <strong>of</strong> the adverb with respect to the finite verb, exactly as in the previous examples<br />

with again. <strong>The</strong> relevant Czech examples are given in (27).<br />

(27) a. Maruška zavřela [ V P skoro dveře].<br />

Mary closed almost door<br />

b. Maruška [ vP skoro zavřela dveře].<br />

Mary almost closed door<br />

<strong>The</strong> semantic difference is preserved in subject-wh question-answer pairs as well. As we<br />

can see in (28) and (29), the VP attachment results in an answer with a postverbal adverb,<br />

while the vP attachment results in an answer with a clause-initial adverb. Thus, we can<br />

account for the data in the same way as we accounted for the examples with again. While in<br />

(28) both the adverb and the object move as one constituent, in (29), they move separately.<br />

(28) a. Kdo zavřel skoro dveře?<br />

who closed almost door<br />

‘Who almost closed the door (but haven’t finished the closing)?’<br />

b. Skoro dveře zavřela || Maruška.<br />

almost door closed Mary<br />

‘Mary almost closed the door (but she hasn’t finished the closing event be-<br />

76


cause she was interrupted by her mother.).’<br />

c. almost door closed || Marie t V t almost t door<br />

(29) a. Kdo skoro zavřel dveře?<br />

who almost closed door<br />

‘Who almost closed the door (but then decided not to)?’<br />

b. Dveře skoro zavřela || Maruška.<br />

door almost closed Mary<br />

‘Mary almost closed the door (but then she decided not to).’<br />

c. door almost closed || Marie t almost t V t door<br />

Let’s now go step by step through the derivation <strong>of</strong> the examples in (24-b) and (25-b).<br />

<strong>The</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> the exercise is to see how exactly the system derives the reversed order <strong>of</strong><br />

the adverb and the object that we witness in cases with separate G-movements, in contrast<br />

to the preserved word order in case the given elements move as one constituent.<br />

Consider the example in (24-b). First, the VP is merged and the adverb is adjoined<br />

to it. <strong>The</strong>re is no need for G-movement because the structure so far contains only given<br />

elements. In the next step, V moves to v (to check its features) and the subject is merged,<br />

(30-a). At this point, the verb, the adverb and the object all need to move above the new<br />

subject. Only the verb, however, is able to do that because <strong>of</strong> the head movement constraint<br />

on G-movement, (30-b). After that, the adverb and the object are free to G-move as one<br />

constituent, as in (30-c). <strong>The</strong> reason why this step is possible is that both given elements<br />

are dominated by a constituent which is able to move. In this case it is VP.<br />

(30) Derivation <strong>of</strong> (24-b)<br />

a. vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

closed<br />

VP<br />

again<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

door<br />

77


. TP<br />

closed<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

t v<br />

VP<br />

again<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

door<br />

c. TP<br />

VP<br />

TP<br />

again t V door<br />

closed<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

t v<br />

t V P<br />

We can now proceed with the derivation <strong>of</strong> the example in (25-b). As we can see in (31),<br />

no G-movement takes place before vP is completed. At this point, the verb, the adverb and<br />

the object need to G-move because they all are asymmetrically c-commanded by the new<br />

subject Mary. Again, the verb must move first, (31-b). After this movement takes place,<br />

the object and the adverb need to move. I have already anticipated that they cannot move as<br />

one constituent. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the only constituent that dominates the given elements<br />

and no new element is an X-bar projection. Since X-bar projections in Czech cannot move,<br />

the given elements must move separately. <strong>The</strong> question is whether the given elements move<br />

on nesting or crossing paths. I argue, based on the actual word order we get, that the paths<br />

must be nesting, as in (31-c).<br />

(31) a. vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

again<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

door<br />

78


. TP<br />

T-v-V<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

again<br />

vP<br />

t v−V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

door<br />

c. TP<br />

door<br />

TP<br />

again<br />

TP<br />

T-v-V<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

vP<br />

t again<br />

vP<br />

t v−V<br />

VP<br />

t V<br />

t door<br />

Notice that so far there is nothing in our system that would guarantee the right order <strong>of</strong><br />

movement <strong>of</strong> given elements. <strong>The</strong> extension condition on G-movement is not on its own<br />

sufficient. In order to account for the word order facts, I propose that if more than one<br />

given element moves in the same point <strong>of</strong> the derivation, they obey the Path Containment<br />

Condition, as defined in Pesetsky (1982). <strong>The</strong> definition <strong>of</strong> the Path Containment Condition<br />

(and the supplementary definitions) are given in (32)–(34).<br />

(32) Path Containment Condition (PCC) (Pesetsky, 1982, ex. (94), p. 309)<br />

If two paths overlap, one must contain the other.<br />

(33) Definition <strong>of</strong> Paths (Pesetsky, 1982, ex. (69), p. 289)<br />

Suppose t is an empty category locally A-bound by b. <strong>The</strong>n<br />

79


a. for α the first maximal projection dominating t<br />

b. for β the first maximal projection dominating b<br />

c. the path between t and b is the set <strong>of</strong> nodes P such that P = {x|(x =α) (x dom.<br />

α & ¬xdom.β)}<br />

(34) Overlapping (Pesetsky, 1982, ex. (93), p. 309)<br />

Two paths overlap iff their intersection is non-null and non-singleton.<br />

In a way, given elements behave as if they were attracted by a feature and obeyed the Attract<br />

Closest Condition. Since we do not have any feature trigger in the system, we must<br />

stay with the descriptive generalization requiring given elements to move on non-crossing<br />

paths. One may wonder whether this is a problem for our system, or whether it is possible<br />

that the source <strong>of</strong> the path containment behavior is somewhere else than in having a feature<br />

trigger. I do not attempt to answer this question here.<br />

<strong>The</strong> fact that is crucial for our discussion is that that the Path Containment Condition<br />

results in the reversed word order <strong>of</strong> the given constituents. In contrast, if given elements<br />

may move as one constituent, their order is preserved. I argue that it is a combination <strong>of</strong><br />

these two strategies that captures the variety <strong>of</strong> word order patterns in Czech.<br />

We can now approach the other case in which given elements cannot move as one<br />

constituent. We will be looking at structures where there is no constituent that would<br />

dominate only given elements. Such an example is given in (35).<br />

(35) a. Co dělal Petr včera s autem?<br />

what did Petr.Nom yesterday with car<br />

‘What did Petr do yesterday with his car?’<br />

b. Petr auto včera || řídil rychle.<br />

Petr.Nom car.Acc yesterday drove quickly<br />

‘Yesterday Petr drove fast his car.’<br />

To see how the derivation proceeds, consider first the corresponding basic word order given<br />

in (36). As we can see schematized in (37), the word order <strong>of</strong> given elements is partially<br />

reversed (Peter>yesterday>car versus Peter>car>yesterday).<br />

(36) Petr řídil včera rychle auto.<br />

Petr.Nom drove yesterday quickly car.Acc<br />

‘Yesterday Petr drove fast his car.’<br />

(37) Subj-G Obj-G Adv1-G || verb t Adv1 Adv2 t Obj<br />

Let’s now go through the derivation step by step. <strong>The</strong> derivation is given in (38). We<br />

know from the basic word order that both the adverbs are adjoined to VP (the finite verb,<br />

which is at v, precedes them). <strong>The</strong> given constituents are marked by boxes. First, the<br />

verb and the object are merged. At this point, the object undergoes G-movement above<br />

the verb, as in (38-a). <strong>The</strong>n, the new adverb ‘quickly’ is merged and the object needs to<br />

80


move again, (38-b). When the given adverb ‘yesterday’ is merged, no G-movement takes<br />

place. VP is completed and V moves to v, (38-c). At this point, the object and the adverb<br />

‘yesterday’ need to G-move. <strong>The</strong>y cannot move as one constituent, however, because there<br />

is no constituent that would contain only given elements. This is because <strong>of</strong> the new adverb<br />

quickly. Thus the object and the adverb must move separately. <strong>The</strong> derivation is completed<br />

by merging the subject, as in (38-d).<br />

(38) a. VP<br />

car<br />

VP<br />

drove<br />

t car<br />

b. VP<br />

car<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

t car<br />

VP<br />

drove<br />

t car<br />

c. vP<br />

drove<br />

VP<br />

yesterday<br />

VP<br />

car<br />

VP<br />

quickly<br />

VP<br />

t car<br />

VP<br />

t drove<br />

t car<br />

81


d. vP<br />

Petr<br />

vP<br />

car<br />

vP<br />

yesterday<br />

vP<br />

drove<br />

VP<br />

t yesterday<br />

VP<br />

t car<br />

VP<br />

quickly . . .<br />

We can test on this example a further G-movement property – its strictly cyclic character.<br />

Let’s see what happens if we only minimally change the example in (35-b). Let the subject<br />

be new this time as well. First <strong>of</strong> all, what do we expect in our system? We are now in the<br />

point <strong>of</strong> the derivation that corresponds to (38-d), repeated below as (39).<br />

(39) vP<br />

Petr<br />

vP<br />

car<br />

vP<br />

yesterday<br />

vP<br />

drove<br />

VP<br />

t yesterday<br />

VP<br />

t car<br />

VP<br />

quickly . . .<br />

82


Since the subject is new, the derivation cannot stop here. Instead, the verb must move<br />

again, followed by the given object and the given adverb. <strong>The</strong> interesting question is how<br />

the given elements move. Since there is still no constituent that would dominate only<br />

the given elements, the given elements must move separately. Thus, we predict that their<br />

already reversed order would be reversed again, i.e., the final order would be identical to<br />

their basic word order. This prediction is born out as can be seen in (40). <strong>The</strong> corresponding<br />

derivation is given in (41).<br />

(40) a. Who and what did yesterday with the car?<br />

b. Včera auto || řídil Petr rychle.<br />

yesterday car drove Petr quickly<br />

‘Petr drove yesterday car quickly.’<br />

(41) a. TP<br />

drove<br />

vP<br />

Petr<br />

vP<br />

car<br />

vP<br />

yesterday<br />

vP<br />

t d.<br />

VP<br />

t y.<br />

VP<br />

t c.<br />

VP<br />

quickly . . .<br />

83


. TP<br />

yesterday<br />

TP<br />

car<br />

TP<br />

drove<br />

vP<br />

Petr<br />

vP<br />

t car<br />

vP<br />

t yesterday . . .<br />

VP<br />

quickly . . .<br />

To sum up, we have seen in this section that G-movement can target a single given<br />

element as well as a constituent dominating more than one given element. I have argued<br />

that movement <strong>of</strong> a constituent containing more than one given element is preferred to<br />

moving the given elements separately. Whether such a constituent may G-move depends<br />

on two factors: (i) such a constituent must independently be able to move, and (ii) the<br />

constituent may dominate only given element sat the point <strong>of</strong> G-movement. I have argued<br />

that the variety <strong>of</strong> word order patterns found in Czech arises from a combination <strong>of</strong> the two<br />

moving strategies: (i) given elements moving separately, and (ii) given elements moving<br />

as one constituent. Thus, G-movement turned out to be a sufficient tool for deriving the<br />

complex Czech data. But we have also seen that we do not have a sufficient metrics yet<br />

that would decide when exactly G-movement is licensed. In chapter 4 I will show how the<br />

syntax-semantics interface decides when G-movement is licensed and when it is not.<br />

3.3 Summary<br />

In this section, we have seen how G-movement introduces a sort <strong>of</strong> verb second pattern<br />

in which the given elements are moved around the verbal head, unless such a given element<br />

is the last element merged in the relevant part <strong>of</strong> the derivation. I have argued that if<br />

more than one given element can move as one constituent, such a derivation is preferred<br />

to a derivation in which the given elements undergo independent movement. In contrast,<br />

if several given elements cannot move as one constituent, they must move independently.<br />

<strong>The</strong> independent instances <strong>of</strong> G-movement must obey the Path containment condition. I<br />

argued that a combination <strong>of</strong> these two strategies – order preserving movement <strong>of</strong> one con-<br />

84


stituent containing several given element versus order reversing movement <strong>of</strong> several given<br />

elements – derives the variety <strong>of</strong> word order patterns found in Czech.<br />

In the next chapter I will address the question <strong>of</strong> what drives G-movement. I will built<br />

on results from this and the previous chapters, mainly on the conclusion that G-movement<br />

is an extremely local, last resort operation that seems to be insensitive to possible feature<br />

percolation. I will propose that G-movement is free movement that is restricted only by<br />

interface requirements, in particular, by the syntax-semantics interface.<br />

85


Chapter 4<br />

Semantic Interpretation<br />

<strong>The</strong> proposal to be developed here is similar to recent proposals that attempt to tie information<br />

structure related movement to properties <strong>of</strong> the syntax-phonology interface (for<br />

example, Cinque 1993; Reinhart 1995; Zubizarreta 1998; Arregui-Urbina 2002; Szendrői<br />

2003). Even though I assume that the phonological facts should be derivable from the<br />

proposed syntactic structure, the syntax-phonology interface is not understood here as the<br />

trigger <strong>of</strong> overt syntactic movement. I will argue instead that the burden should be put on<br />

the syntax-semantics interface.<br />

<strong>The</strong> basic idea behind my proposal is that G-movement is free syntactic movement restricted<br />

by semantics in the sense that syntactic items move in order to create a partition<br />

between elements to be interpreted as given and elements to be interpreted as new (cf.<br />

Neeleman and van de Koot 2006 for a similar idea). <strong>The</strong> partition is interpreted by the semantic<br />

module as a partition between what is presupposed and what is not, while satisfying<br />

the Maximize Presupposition maxim (cf. Heim 1991).<br />

As we will see, however, G-movement is only one part <strong>of</strong> a system <strong>of</strong> marking elements<br />

as given. I will concentrate here on coordinations and basic word order structures in which<br />

the same requirement on a partition between given and new applies even though there is no<br />

movement attested.<br />

<strong>The</strong> chapter is structured as follows. First, I will recapitulate the syntactic results <strong>of</strong> the<br />

previous chapters and I will highlight the type <strong>of</strong> data that the current syntactic system cannot<br />

account for. In section 4.2, I will introduce a semantic operator, the purpose <strong>of</strong> which<br />

is to recursively mark syntactic elements as presupposed. In sections 4.3, I will develop a<br />

system which uses the Maximize Presupposition maxim <strong>of</strong> Heim (1991) to distribute the<br />

semantic operator and to evaluate syntactic derivations with respect to givenness. Section<br />

4.4 will present the system in more details. Sections 4.5 and 4.6 will formalize the notion<br />

<strong>of</strong> givenness in Czech and address the question <strong>of</strong> how givenness in Czech relates to deaccentation<br />

in English. Section 4.7 shortly addresses the role <strong>of</strong> phonology in the system and<br />

finally section 4.8 concludes the chapter.<br />

86


4.1 Where we stand<br />

In the previous chapters I have introduced G-movement as a tool to derive a hierarchical<br />

partition between given and new material. We have seen that in order to derive the word<br />

order within the given part, movement must be extremely local and cyclic. We have also<br />

seen that this type <strong>of</strong> movement is a last resort operation in the sense that it takes place only<br />

when it is needed to achieve a distinct semantic interpretation. Crucially, we have also seen<br />

that an element may be given without undergoing G-movement.<br />

I have provided evidence suggesting that G-movement is not feature-driven: G-movement<br />

may take place at any point <strong>of</strong> the derivation. <strong>The</strong> only relevant criterion is the information<br />

structure status <strong>of</strong> a newly (re-)merged item. Interestingly, the movement <strong>of</strong> α is restricted<br />

by head movement <strong>of</strong> the head in the projection in which α was originally merged. I<br />

have suggested that we should understand the relation between head movement and G-<br />

movement as a kind <strong>of</strong> parasitic relation: head movement creates a landing site for α. <strong>The</strong><br />

idea is that in case there is no feature attractor, an element must exploit an independently<br />

existing structure.<br />

Since elements can be given without undergoing G-movement, G-movement per se<br />

does not mark an element as given. G-movement only creates a structure in which such an<br />

element may be interpreted as given. <strong>The</strong> syntactic module does whatever it can do within<br />

its own limitations and it is up to the interface(s) to figure the relevant interpretation and<br />

to license the structure. Notice that, except for the head movement restriction, we have not<br />

seen any constraints on G-movement that are not attested elsewhere in the syntax <strong>of</strong> Czech.<br />

Is this right, though? Is the only purpose <strong>of</strong> G-movement really to create a particular<br />

configuration? As we will see, this is indeed so. A piece <strong>of</strong> direct evidence comes from<br />

coordination facts. Even though there is no movement attested within (and out <strong>of</strong>) a coordination,<br />

a given element must still linearly precede a new element. Consider the examples<br />

in (2) and (3). In the relevant context, (1), only the verb ‘read’ is given. As we can see, it<br />

must linearly precede the new verb ‘translate’. <strong>The</strong> examples in (4) are here as a control to<br />

show that if the verb ‘read’ were not trapped within a coordination it would have to move.<br />

Boldface in the following examples stands for given.<br />

(1) Many <strong>of</strong> my friends have recently decided to change their lifestyle. . .<br />

a. Tak jedna moje kamarádka bude víc číst. ←− context<br />

so one my friend will more read<br />

‘For example, a friend <strong>of</strong> mine will read more.’<br />

(2) A její přítel bude [číst a překládat]. ←− ̌new > VP & VP<br />

and her friend will read and translate<br />

‘And her boyfriend will read and translate.’<br />

(3) #A její přítel bude [překládat a číst]. ←− # VP & VP<br />

and her friend will translate and read<br />

‘And her boyfriend will translate and read.’<br />

87


(4) a. Číst bude (taky) její přítel .<br />

read will also her friend<br />

‘Her boyfriend will read as well.’<br />

b. #Její přítel bude číst.<br />

her friend will read<br />

<strong>The</strong> same pattern emerges with coordinated DPs. As we can see from the contrast between<br />

(6-a) and (6-b), a given DP must precede a new DP. Thus, the emerging pattern can be<br />

summarized as in (7), where boldface stands for given.<br />

(5) Na programu byla diskuse o nové učitelce. ←− context<br />

on program was discussion about new teacher<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the program was a discussion about a new teacher.’<br />

(6) a. Učitelku a žáky to překvapilo. ←− ̌DP & DP<br />

teacher and students it surprised<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> teacher and students were surprised by it.’<br />

b. #Žáky a učitelku a to překvapilo. ←− # DP & DP<br />

students and teacher it surprised<br />

‘Students and a teacher were surprised by it.’<br />

(7) Generalization about coordination:<br />

a. A & B<br />

b. #B & A<br />

<strong>The</strong> facts are, however, more subtle. Recall the discussion about the distribution <strong>of</strong> pronouns<br />

in section 1.5. We have seen that in general a given DP cannot be asymmetrically<br />

c-commanded by a new element. In such a configuration the DP must be realized as a<br />

pronoun or it must be modified by a demonstrative pronoun. <strong>The</strong> same holds here. Within<br />

a coordination, a given DP may follow a new element only if the DP is pronominalized, as<br />

in (8).<br />

(8) a. #Žáky a učitelku to překvapilo. ←− # DP & DP<br />

students and teacher it surprised<br />

‘Students and a teacher were surprised by that.’<br />

b. Žáky a tu učitelku to překvapilo. ←− ̌DP & that DP<br />

students and that teacher it surprised<br />

‘Students and that teacher were surprised by that.’<br />

c. Žáky i ji to překvapilo. ←− ̌DP & pronoun<br />

students and her it surprised<br />

‘She (=the teacher) and students were surprised by that.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> pronominalization facts bring up another important issue. Recall that in section 1.5<br />

we have seen that if a DP coordination is asymmetrically c-commanded by new material, a<br />

given DP is degraded even if it is the first conjunct. Interestingly, coordinated VPs behave<br />

88


differently. As we have seen in (2), there is no problem for a VP conjunct to be asymmetrically<br />

c-commanded by a new material, as long as the given conjunct precedes the new<br />

conjunct.<br />

One might think that the difference between a VP and a DP coordination lies in that<br />

there is no pronominal/anaphoric element that could replace a VP trapped in a coordination.<br />

Before we try to develop a system that could capture the difference between nouns and<br />

verbs, let’s first check whether the existence or non-existence <strong>of</strong> an anaphoric element is the<br />

relevant difference. If the difference is really between having and not-having an anaphoric<br />

counterpart, we expect that the difference should hold even within the same lexical category<br />

in case the differing lexical items have or do not have an anaphoric counterpart. Such<br />

a category is adverbs. As we can see in the examples in (11), non-pronominalized adverbials<br />

show the same restriction on ordering as DPs and VPs. Interestingly, the restriction<br />

on ordering disappears once we replace the adverbial ‘in Boston’ with pronominal adverb<br />

‘here’, as in (12). 1 Thus, we see the same pattern as with DPs. <strong>The</strong>re is, however, an interesting<br />

contrast. While in the case <strong>of</strong> a DP coordination, pronominalization is obligatory,<br />

in the case <strong>of</strong> coordinated adverbs it seems to be optional. Thus adverbials seem to pattern<br />

partially with DPs and partially with VPs. One could argue that the difference might<br />

lie in the uncertainty <strong>of</strong> judgments related to temporal and spacial indexicals. Even if I<br />

utter the sentence in (11-a) in Boston, it is not clear that being in Boston is the common<br />

ground between the participants <strong>of</strong> the communication. It might be understood as being<br />

in Cambridge, being at MIT, being in my <strong>of</strong>fice etc. In section 4.3 I will argue, though,<br />

that it is possible to account for the difference on independent grammatical grounds. <strong>The</strong><br />

difference between having or not having a pronominal counterpart will be only indirect for<br />

the proposal developed here.<br />

(9) My social life in Boston is bearable because. . . ←− context<br />

(10) v Bostonu žije taky moje kamarádka Petra.<br />

in Boston lives also my friend Petra<br />

‘. . . my friend Petra lives in Boston as well.’<br />

(11) a. moje kamarádka Petra žije napůl v Bostonu a napůl v New<br />

my friend Petr lives half in Boston and half in New<br />

‘. . . my friend Petra lives half in Boston and half in New York.’<br />

b. #moje kamarádka Petra žije napůl v New Yorku a napůl v<br />

my friend Petr lives half in New York and half in<br />

‘. . . my friend Petra lives half in New York and half in Boston.’<br />

(12) a. moje kamarádka Petra žije napůl tady a napůl v New<br />

my friend Petr lives half here and half in New<br />

‘. . . my friend Petra lives half here and half in New York.’<br />

b. moje kamarádka Petra žije napůl v New Yorku a napůl<br />

my friend Petr lives half in New York and half<br />

‘. . . my friend Petra lives half half in New York and half here.’<br />

Yorku.<br />

York<br />

Yorku.<br />

York<br />

Bostonu.<br />

Boston<br />

tady.<br />

here<br />

1 In contrast to English, Czech ‘tady’ is an anaphoric element, unlike ‘here’. Non-anaphoric counterpart<br />

<strong>of</strong> ‘here’ is ‘zde’.<br />

89


To summarize, we have seen that there are two different strategies to mark a syntactic<br />

element in Czech as given. (i) Either an element is in an appropriate configuration (given<br />

precedes new), or (ii) it is lexically marked as given. <strong>The</strong> appropriate configuration can<br />

be achieved either by base generation or by G-movement. <strong>The</strong> relevant environments we<br />

have discussed so far are summarized in (13). We have also seen that failing to be in an<br />

appropriate configuration is not necessarily a problem. <strong>The</strong> facts are more subtle, as we<br />

have seen in the coordination <strong>of</strong> adverbs.<br />

(13) Summary <strong>of</strong> environments in which a given element must precede a new element:<br />

a. finite clause (may involve cyclic G-movement)<br />

b. domain defined by verb movement (may involve local G-movement)<br />

c. coordination (no movement)<br />

<strong>The</strong> syntactic mechanisms introduced so far create the right partition when some G-movement<br />

takes place. It cannot, however, account for the word order constraint in coordination and it<br />

cannot account for the distributional pattern <strong>of</strong> pronominalized versus non-pronominalized<br />

elements because G-movement is the only mechanism that can improve a suboptimal structure.<br />

<strong>The</strong> question is whether we can do better.<br />

Let’s first see whether we can do better if we take into account current insights about the<br />

syntax <strong>of</strong> information structure. <strong>The</strong>re are two main approaches to consider: cartographic<br />

approaches (Rizzi, 1997, 2004; Cinque, 2002; Belletti, 2004; Aboh, 2004, among others)<br />

and interface-driven approaches (Vallduví, 1992; Cinque, 1993; Reinhart, 1995; Erteschik-<br />

Shir, 1997; Zubizarreta, 1998; Arregui-Urbina, 2002; Szendrői, 2003, among others). 2 <strong>The</strong><br />

cartographic approaches cannot deal with the Czech word order data. Such an approach<br />

would have problems with ordering within the given part (when should the order be preserved,<br />

when should it be reversed?), with ordering within a coordination (if feature checking<br />

can be done by Agree, why this option is not available for any given element?), and<br />

with the fact that not only given but sometimes also new elements (a finite verb) undergo<br />

movement. <strong>The</strong> interface-driven approaches (more precisely approaches which rely on the<br />

syntax-phonology interface) deal with the Czech data much better. For example, if we consider<br />

a rather abstract version <strong>of</strong> the nuclear stress rule, we might be able to account for<br />

most <strong>of</strong> the ordering patterns. But unfortunately, exactly the cases which cannot be captured<br />

by G-movement, such as ordering within a coordination and the difference between<br />

coordinated DPs and coordinated VPs, would be left aside as well. Furthermore, a phonology<br />

driven approach does not provide any insight for deriving the empirical generalization.<br />

I argue that the missing part in our understanding <strong>of</strong> givenness is the syntax-semantics<br />

interface. Even though many <strong>of</strong> the above mentioned authors are concerned with the semantic<br />

interpretation <strong>of</strong> givenness (or focus), the syntax-semantics interface is not understood<br />

as the key component. Instead, the syntactic component or the phonological component<br />

works in parallel to the semantics. I argue that we indeed do want to put the main burden<br />

2 I do not comment here on optimality theory approaches (Choi, 1999; Downing et al., 2006; Zerbian,<br />

2006, among others) and functionalist approaches (Sgall et al., 1986; Firbas, 1992, among others).<br />

90


on the semantic component, more precisely on the semantics and the pragmatic component.<br />

Once we do this, we do not need to refer at all to information structure in syntax and/or in<br />

phonology.<br />

Notice that we have never defined what it means to be given in Czech. Following<br />

Schwarzschild (1999), I argue that a given element in Czech must have a salient antecedent.<br />

As we will see in section 4.5, however, this is not a sufficient condition for givenness in<br />

Czech. For an element to be given in Czech, the element must be existentially presupposed.<br />

(14) For α to be given,<br />

a. α must have a salient antecedent (cf. Schwarzschild 1999), and<br />

b. α must be presupposed.<br />

Consider now the following English example. <strong>The</strong> relevant utterance is the utterance<br />

in (15-c). As we can see in (16) the Czech counterpart <strong>of</strong> (15-c) is infelicitous, unless the<br />

string is reordered as in (16). <strong>The</strong> crucial question is why (16) is not well-formed.<br />

(15) a. Q: Any news about Mary or her sister?<br />

b. A: Not much. But I’ve heard that. . .<br />

c. the new president fell in love with Mary.<br />

(16) #Nový prezident se zamiloval do Marie.<br />

new president.Nom REFL loved into Marie.Gen<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> new president fell in love with Marie.’<br />

(17) Do Marii se zamiloval nový prezident.<br />

into Marie.Gen REFL loved new president.Nom<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> new president fell in love with Mary.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> answer to this question is in fact far from being trivial. We know that the utterance in<br />

(16) is syntactically well-formed. As the semantic interpretation is concerned, the utterance<br />

is well formed as well. <strong>The</strong>re is no problem with interpreting the utterance irrespectively<br />

<strong>of</strong> whether or not Marie is presupposed. Furthermore, according to our informal definition<br />

<strong>of</strong> givenness in (14), if Marie is presupposed, Marie is given. To conclude, with our current<br />

system, there is no reason for Marie to G-move. We predict that the utterance in (16)<br />

should be well formed and felicitous, but this is incorrect. This is true in general: in the<br />

system in place there is no reason for an element to G-move.<br />

I argue that the problem lies in a peculiarity <strong>of</strong> Czech that is schematically captured in<br />

(18). Roughly, an element cannot be presupposed without structurally higher elements in<br />

the same domain being presupposed as well.<br />

(18) A peculiarity <strong>of</strong> Czech:<br />

Within a domain [ Dom Y . . . X], if X is presupposed, so is Y.<br />

With respect to the utterance in (16), there are two options that can arise. Either (i) Marie is<br />

presupposed, or (ii) Marie is not presupposed. Let’s evaluate these two options. (i) If Marie<br />

is presupposed, it follows from (18) that ‘new president’ must be presupposed as well. But<br />

91


such an interpretation would lead to Presupposition failure. What about the other option?<br />

If we do not presuppose Marie, nothing goes wrong either in syntax or in semantics. I<br />

argue that in order to exclude option (ii) we need to refer to a pragmatic principle called<br />

Maximize Presupposition, given in (19). I argue that if Marie in (16) is not presupposed<br />

then (16) violates the Maximize Presupposition maxim.<br />

(19) Maximize Presupposition (after Heim (1991))<br />

In context C use the most informative presupposition satisfied in C.<br />

We can thus conclude that (16) is not well formed because Marie cannot be interpreted as<br />

presupposed in this particular syntactic configuration. <strong>The</strong> only way to interpret Marie as<br />

presupposed is to change the structure, i.e, to move Marie above the new elements.<br />

To formalize the idea about marking givenness introduced in this chapter, we will first<br />

need to derive the descriptive generalization about Czech given in (18). <strong>The</strong>n I will introduce<br />

a formal evaluation component that decides what structure satisfies the Maximize<br />

presupposition maxim in the relevant context. I will argue for a global comparison system<br />

which will evaluate syntactic structure at the level <strong>of</strong> a phase.<br />

More concretely, in the next subsection I will derive (18) by introducing a semantic<br />

operator which recursively marks syntactic elements as presupposed. <strong>The</strong>n I will show<br />

how this operator interacts with Maximize Presupposition. I will also show how the modified<br />

system can account for the Czech cases discussed in chapters 1–3. In section 4.3 I<br />

will show how the modified system can account for the coordination facts that have been a<br />

problem for the original system. Section 4.5 formalizes the notion <strong>of</strong> givenness in Czech<br />

and in section 4.6 I will address the question <strong>of</strong> the relation <strong>of</strong> G-movement in Czech and<br />

deaccentation in English. Finally, in section 4.7 I will show why a syntax-phonology interface<br />

system is not a viable alternative.<br />

It has already been suggested that Maximize Presupposition may license movement<br />

(see Wagner (2005, To appear a) and Wagner (To appear b)). I want to extend the idea to<br />

licensing other grammatical structures as well. Roughly, Maximize Presupposition may be<br />

used for global comparison <strong>of</strong> different derivations. It is up to the reference set to incorporate<br />

whatever the relevant means <strong>of</strong> expressing givenness in a particular language are.<br />

<strong>The</strong> intuition to capture is that there may be more than one grammatical tool to consider<br />

within the comparison set. Thus, while some languages use, for example, morphological<br />

marking (for definite articles) or prosodic tools (deaccenting) as means which can give rise<br />

to a presupposition (can pick up a unique referent from the discourse), other languages may<br />

have other tools. I argue that Czech uses movement (cf. Hlavsa (1975) for a similar idea)<br />

and a linear partition between given and new as such a tool. 3<br />

3 Notice I do not claim that givenness in Czech corresponds to definiteness. Even though there may be a<br />

partial overlap, these are two different notions.<br />

92


4.2 Marking givenness by an operator<br />

Recall that the example in (16) is not well formed no matter whether Marie is presupposed<br />

or not. If Marie is not presupposed the pragmatic principle Maximize Presupposition is<br />

violated. In contrast, if Marie is presupposed, (16) is out because <strong>of</strong> the peculiarity <strong>of</strong><br />

Czech characterized in (18). <strong>The</strong> question is whether we can derive (18), repeated below<br />

as (20).<br />

(20) A peculiarity <strong>of</strong> Czech:<br />

Within a domain [ Dom Y . . . X], if X is presupposed, so is Y.<br />

Roughly, we need something that adds a presupposition to an element without affecting<br />

the assertion. I will implement this idea by using a semantic operator that I will call G-<br />

operator.<br />

In principle we could have a semantic operator that could apply anywhere in the structure<br />

and which would mark its sister as given (see Sauerland (2005) for such a proposal for<br />

English). Consider the structures in (21) and (22) which demonstrate such a proposal.<br />

(21) =⇒<br />

<br />

given<br />

given<br />

(22)<br />

given<br />

new new . . .<br />

G<br />

<br />

given G new new . . .<br />

This structure does not seem to be right because such an operator would not capture<br />

(18) and as a result no movement would be needed. Recall that even though sometimes<br />

elements can be interpreted as given in situ, they usually relocate to the left edge <strong>of</strong> their<br />

domain.<br />

Furthermore, as the following subsection intends to show the relevant domains for<br />

movement and for spreading presuppositions correspond to a proposition (type < s,t >).<br />

We thus need an operator that can take more than one element (a recursive operator) and<br />

that is sensitive to semantic types in that it terminates on type .<br />

(23) <br />

given<br />

given<br />

G<br />

new<br />

new . . .<br />

93


In this section I will propose such a recursive operator. I will show how the operator<br />

motivates the location <strong>of</strong> given elements on the left edge <strong>of</strong> their domain and the fact that<br />

the domains correspond to propositions. In section 4.2.1, I will give arguments for the<br />

domains being propositional. Next, in section 4.2.2, I will define the operator and I will<br />

show how it interacts with the Maximize presupposition maxim.<br />

4.2.1 G-movement domains are propositional domains<br />

So far, we have seen several types <strong>of</strong> domains within which G-movement takes place. Either<br />

(i) the domain corresponds to a finite clause, which we can take to be a proposition<br />

without any further discussion, or (ii) the domain is whatever is selected by a tense auxiliary,<br />

or (iii) the domain is a small clause. 4<br />

If we assume that a tensed auxiliary selects for a proposition, following Ogihara (1996),<br />

among others, we can conclude that in all the cases discussed so far, the relevant domain<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement is a proposition. <strong>The</strong> relation is schematized in (24). <strong>The</strong> examples in<br />

(25)–(27) illustrate the relation between a tense auxiliary and the domain <strong>of</strong> G-movement.<br />

(24) a. Future:<br />

Aux-v < proposition VP ><br />

b. Past:<br />

Aux-T < proposition vP + VP ><br />

c. Present:<br />

< proposition (CP) + TP + vP + VP ><br />

(25) Future:<br />

(26) Past:<br />

a. What will happen with all the money that was found in the building?<br />

b. Nějaký úředník [ vP bude [ V P peníze || pravidelně posílat opuštěným<br />

some clerk.Nom will money.Acc regularly send lonely<br />

dětem.]]<br />

children.Dat<br />

‘A clerk will regularly send the money to lonely children.’<br />

a. What happened with all the money that was found in the building?<br />

b. Nějaký úředník a já [ TP jsme [ vP peníze || pravidelně posílali<br />

some clerk.Nom and I were money.Acc regularly sent<br />

opuštěným dětem.]]<br />

lonely children.Dat<br />

‘A clerk and regularly sent the money to lonely children.’<br />

(27) Present:<br />

4 I put aside DPs and coordinations where we have not detected G-movement. I will get back to the<br />

coordination facts in section 4.4.<br />

94


a. What happens with all the money that was found in the building?<br />

b. Peníze || posílá pravidelně nějaký úředník opuštěným dětem.<br />

money.Acc sends regularly some clerk.Nom lonely children.Dat<br />

‘A clerk and regularly sends the money to lonely children.’<br />

So far the correlation between auxiliary selection and the domain <strong>of</strong> G-movement being a<br />

proposition is only suggestive. Even though such a correlation is possible, the relation is<br />

not straightforward. Furthermore, the assumption that tense selects a proposition has been<br />

questioned in recent literature on tense (Kusumoto, 2005).<br />

In the rest <strong>of</strong> this subsection I will build an additional argument for treating domains <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movement as propositions. <strong>The</strong> argument is based on behavior <strong>of</strong> propositional modifiers<br />

such as ‘again’. Modifiers such as ‘again’ are known to be able to attach at different<br />

levels <strong>of</strong> a syntactic structure and their different syntactic position corresponds to different<br />

scope properties. Bale (To appear) has noticed that while the attachment site <strong>of</strong> modifiers<br />

like ‘again’ may vary, the constituent ‘again’ attaches to is always a proposition. Since only<br />

a proposition gives rise to a presupposition we can test whether a constituent is a proposition<br />

or not by looking at presuppositions the modifier gives rise to.<br />

Thus if the hypothesis about the relation between G-movement and propositions is correct,<br />

we predict that different tenses in Czech should have different presuppositions. Let’s<br />

consider the difference between perfective versus imperfective future tense formation in<br />

Czech. While the imperfect future tense is formed by a v-generated auxiliary and an infinitive,<br />

the perfective future tense is formed by a synthetic finite verbal form. See the<br />

examples in (28).<br />

(28) a. Marie nakoupí (*dvě<br />

Marie.Nom shops.Fut.Perf two<br />

‘Marie will shop.’<br />

b. Marie bude nakupovat dvě<br />

Marie will.3.sg. shop.Inf.Imp two<br />

‘Marie will shop for two hours.’<br />

hodiny).<br />

hours<br />

hodiny.<br />

hours<br />

If we assume that the imperfective auxiliary selects for a proposition and that the subject<br />

is base generated as the specifier <strong>of</strong> vP, we predict that the structure may give rise to a<br />

presupposition that excludes the subject. In contrast, since in the perfective future tense the<br />

domain <strong>of</strong> G-movement is bigger than VP, no subject-less proposition is predicted to be<br />

possible. <strong>The</strong> predictions are schematized in (29). As we will see shortly, the predictions<br />

are borne out.<br />

(29) a. Imperfective Future:<br />

[ vP Subject Aux [ V P again event]]<br />

→ again gives rise to a presupposition in exclusion <strong>of</strong> the subject<br />

b. Perfective Future:<br />

[ vP Subject verb [ V P again . . . ]]<br />

→ again cannot give rise to a presupposition in exclusion <strong>of</strong> the subject<br />

95


Consider first English examples with the modifier ‘again’. Certain verbs (according<br />

to Bale, non-stative verbs) allow again to combine with the VP without giving rise to a<br />

presupposition containing the subject. Thus, as in the example in (30), it is enough that<br />

someone hugged Esme to license again in ‘Jon hugged her again.’ For this sentence to be<br />

felicitous there is no requirement on Jon to have hugged Esme before. Thus, the subject<br />

is not part <strong>of</strong> the relevant presupposition otherwise the sentence with Jon would not be<br />

felicitous (unless there was an event in the past in which Jon hugged Esme).<br />

(30) simplified after Bale’s (28):<br />

a. Jon and his wife love their daughter Esme, and Esme is reassured by overt<br />

expression <strong>of</strong> their love. For example, yesterday Esme felt reassured when<br />

her mother gave her a hug. <strong>The</strong> effect was doubled when. . .<br />

b. Jon hugged her again.<br />

In contrast, other verbs (according to Bale, stative verbs) can combine with again at the<br />

VP level only if the relevant presupposition contains also the subject. As we can see in<br />

the example in (31), for someone to love Frank again, the person must have loved Frank<br />

before. <strong>The</strong> (c) example is here as a control to show that if the subject is not present in the<br />

structure there is nothing wrong with the presupposition triggered by ‘again’.<br />

(31) simplified after Bale’s (47):<br />

a. Seymour’s mother loved Frank, although she was the only one who did. After<br />

a while she no longer cared for Frank. However, Seymour became attached<br />

to the man, and developed strong feelings for him after his mother’s love<br />

subsided. So. . .<br />

b. #Seymour loved Frank again.<br />

c. Frank was loved again.<br />

Czech exhibits the very same cut as we can see in the Czech equivalents <strong>of</strong> the English<br />

examples, given in (32) and (33).<br />

(32) a. Petr and his wife love their daughter Lucie, and Lucie is reassured by overt<br />

expression <strong>of</strong> their love. For example, yesterday Lucie felt reassured when<br />

her mother gave her a hug. <strong>The</strong> effect was doubled when. . .<br />

b. Petr zase objal Lucii.<br />

Petr.Nom again hugged Lucie.Acc<br />

‘Petr hugged Lucie again.’<br />

(33) a. Petr’s mother loved Martin, although she was the only one who did. After a<br />

while she no longer cared for Martin. However, Petr became attached to the<br />

man, and developed strong feelings for him after his mother’s love subsided.<br />

So. . .<br />

b. #Petr<br />

zase miloval<br />

Petr.Nom again loved<br />

‘Petr loved Martin again.’<br />

byl zase<br />

was again<br />

c. Martin<br />

Martin.Nom<br />

Martina.<br />

Martin.Acc<br />

milován.<br />

loved<br />

96


‘Martin was loved again.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> cut in Czech is identical to the morphologically marked difference between perfective<br />

and imperfective verbs. 5 Thus, while imperfective verbs do obligatory give rise to<br />

a presupposition containing the subject, perfective verbs are compatible with subject-less<br />

presuppositions. Since most Czech verbs have both imperfective and perfective stems we<br />

can test the difference on minimal pairs.<br />

(34) Imperfective version <strong>of</strong> kick:<br />

a. Marie was kicking Petr for half an hour and then she stopped. Petr got relieved<br />

but then. . .<br />

b. #Jana zase kopala Petra.<br />

Jana.Nom again kicked.Impf Petr.Acc<br />

‘Jana kicked Petr again.’<br />

c. Petr byl zase kopán.<br />

Petr.Nom was again kicked<br />

‘Petr was kicked again.’ 6<br />

(35) Perfective version <strong>of</strong> kick:<br />

a. Marie kicked Petr once and then she left. Petr got relieved but then. . .<br />

b. Jana zase kopla Petra.<br />

Jana.Nom again kicked.Perf Petr.Acc<br />

‘Jana kicked Petr again.’<br />

We can see the morphological difference more clearly in the future tense because imperfective<br />

verbs form the analytical future in contrast to perfective verbs which form the<br />

synthetic future.<br />

(36) Imperfective version <strong>of</strong> kick – future:<br />

a. Marie was kicking Petr for half an hour and then she stopped. Petr got relieved<br />

because he didn’t know that. . .<br />

b. #Jana bude zase kopat Petra.<br />

Jana.Nom will again kick.Impf Petr.Acc<br />

‘Jana would kick Petr again.’<br />

(37) Perfective version <strong>of</strong> kick – future:<br />

a. Marie kicked Petr once and then she left. Petr got relieved because he didn’t<br />

know that. . .<br />

b. Jana zase kopne Petra.<br />

Jana.Nom again will-kick.Perf Petr.Acc<br />

5 I believe that Bale’s conclusion that the relevant partition <strong>of</strong> verbs with respect to their propositional<br />

properties is not correct. I think that even in English, the relevant difference is between perfective and<br />

imperfective verbs. <strong>The</strong> difference is, however, not so easily detectable because English does not have any<br />

overt morphological marking that would give a clear cut for Bale’s cases. Bale lists several counterexamples<br />

to his proposal. <strong>The</strong>y all fall under the perfective/imperfective distinction.<br />

6 In fact, the passive form is slightly awkward but this is for independent reason: there is a lexical ambiguity<br />

involving (‘kick’ and ‘dig’) because <strong>of</strong> which a native speaker prefers an impersonal passive to a regular<br />

passive.<br />

97


‘Jana would kick Petr again.’<br />

To conclude, we have seen that there is a correlation between auxiliary selection and the<br />

size <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain. I argue that the presuppositional behavior discussed above<br />

provides additional evidence for treating domains <strong>of</strong> G-movement as propositions.<br />

<strong>The</strong> other cases where we observed very local G-movement were small clauses and<br />

infinitival complements. Also here, we can safely assume that both small clauses and<br />

infinitival complements are propositions. To sum up, in all the relevant cases, the domain<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement corresponds to a proposition. In other words, given elements are adjacent<br />

to type . This will turn out to be crucial for the way we define the G-operator.<br />

4.2.2 <strong>The</strong> G-operator<br />

Let’s recapitulate where we stand. We need a meta-language object that would add a presupposition<br />

to a syntactic element. Such an object (i) needs to be able to add a presupposition<br />

to more than one element (in order to capture the pecualiarity <strong>of</strong> Czech schematized<br />

in (20)), and (ii) it may operate only within a propositional domain (we know that elements<br />

outside <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain does not need to be presupposed). I propose to<br />

implement such an object as the syncategorematic operator defined in (38). 7<br />

(38) G-operator:<br />

G(B)=<br />

{ λA α : Given(A).G(B A) B is <strong>of</strong> type < α,β > for some α, β<br />

other than <br />

B<br />

for B <strong>of</strong> type <br />

<strong>The</strong> operator takes a constituent B and marks its sister A as Given which rougly means<br />

that it adds a presupposition to A. 8 <strong>The</strong> operator is defined with respect to a syntactic<br />

constituent. Thus, whatever can be syntactically (and semantically) combined together<br />

qualifies as good arguments for the operator. <strong>The</strong>re is a checking condition involved: the<br />

operator marks A as given only if B is not <strong>of</strong> type s,t. If B is <strong>of</strong> type s,t, the meaning <strong>of</strong> the<br />

G-operator is an identity function which returns B. 9 Notice that it is immaterial whether<br />

the operator is inserted in the narrow syntax or at LF. <strong>The</strong> only important thing is that it is<br />

syncategorematic in the sense that it is not interpreted compositionally.<br />

Let’s consider a simple derivation to see how the operator works. In the example in (39),<br />

there is only one given element: ‘lollipop’. <strong>The</strong> corresponding LF structure is given in (40).<br />

I follow here Heim and Kratzer (1998) in treating movement as inducing λ-abstraction.<br />

But I modify their proposal in assuming that the operator is inserted above the λ-abstractor.<br />

7 I am grateful to Irene Heim and Roni Katzir for discussing the properties <strong>of</strong> the G-operator with me. <strong>The</strong><br />

formulation <strong>of</strong> the operator in (38) is due Roni Katzir.<br />

8 I will introduce a formal definition <strong>of</strong> Given in section 4.5.<br />

9 To my knowledge, Schwarzschild (1999) was the first to observe that interpreting givenness instead <strong>of</strong><br />

focus allows given elements to be interpreted in a recursive fashion.<br />

98


Furthermore, I assume that if there is more than one given element then the G-operator<br />

is above all the λ-abstracts (cf. Nissenbaum (1998), Nissenbaum (2000) and Beck and<br />

Sauerland (2000)). This is necessary for the G-operator not to terminate below the given<br />

elements.<br />

(39) Lízátko našel chlapec.<br />

lollipop found boy<br />

‘A boy found the lollipop.’<br />

(40)<br />

A=lollipop<br />

C<br />

G C’<br />

7 B<br />

boy B’<br />

found t 7<br />

Simplifying significantly, I assume that head movement is not relevant for the interpretation.<br />

I also assume that both lollipop and boy are individuals. <strong>The</strong> semantic interpretation<br />

is given in (41)–(44). For the sake <strong>of</strong> the simplicity <strong>of</strong> the derivation, I treat propositions in<br />

the following derivations as type t.<br />

(41) found = λx.λy. y found x<br />

B’ = λy. y found x 7<br />

B g = 1 iff boy found g(x 7 )<br />

C’ ∈ D et = λx 7 . boy found x 7<br />

(42)<br />

C = G(C’) =G(λx 7 . boy found x 7 ) =<br />

=λh e : Given(h). G([λx 7 . boy found x 7 ](h)) =<br />

=λh e : Given(h). G(boy found h) =<br />

=λh e : Given(h). boy found h<br />

(43) a. A = l (for lollipop)<br />

b. boy = b<br />

where b and l are individuals<br />

(44) AB = 1 iff<br />

C (A) = 1 iff<br />

[ G (λx. b found x 7 )] (l) = 1 iff<br />

[λh e : Given(h). G ([λx 7 . b found x 7 ](h))](l) = 1 iff<br />

[λh e : Given(h). b found h](l) = 1 iff<br />

l is given: when defined = 1 iff and b found l<br />

As we can see, the G-operator marks A (lollipop) as given but then it terminates because<br />

after the lollipop combines with the rest <strong>of</strong> the clause (boy found), the structure is <strong>of</strong> type<br />

t, thus the G-operator returns an identity function. Notice that if there was more than one<br />

99


given element, the operator would not terminate. Instead it would mark the next element<br />

as presupposed.<br />

<strong>The</strong> reader might be puzzled that the operator leaves its complement intact and propagates<br />

upwards. A more conventional idea <strong>of</strong> a semantic operator is one that applies only to<br />

its complement. Notice, however, that such a binary operator is not uncommon. This is exactly<br />

how, for example, the generalized conjunction (Partee and Rooth, 1983) or ∗-operator<br />

<strong>of</strong> Beck and Sauerland (2000) work.<br />

<strong>The</strong> G-operator as it is defined now does two things for us. First <strong>of</strong> all, it marks everything<br />

from a certain point up as given and it stops at the edge <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain.<br />

Furthermore, once given elements start moving they need to continue moving. <strong>The</strong> reason<br />

is that if there were a new element between two given elements it would be marked as presupposed<br />

as well because the operator would not terminate and the new element would be<br />

necessarily marked as presupposed, leading to presupposition failure. Recall that, for the<br />

operator to terminate, the relevant constituent must correspond to a proposition. We have<br />

thus derived the peculiarity <strong>of</strong> Czech from (20).<br />

Notice, however, that the G-operator per se does not motivate movement. According to<br />

the definition an element can be marked as presupposed even in situ. Consider the following<br />

structure. For the sake <strong>of</strong> simplicity let’s assume that this particular VP is propositional.<br />

(45) VP s t<br />

B=V set G A=object e<br />

In this particular configuration it is no problem for the G-operator to mark the object as<br />

presupposed while leaving everything else intact.<br />

(46) B = λx e . shoot x<br />

A = movie (individual)<br />

(47) B’ = G(B) =<br />

G(λx e . shoot x) =<br />

λh e : Given(h). G ([λx e . shoot x](h)) =<br />

λh e : Given(h). G (shoot h) =<br />

λh e : Given(h). shoot h<br />

(48) AB = 1 iff<br />

B’ (A) = 1 iff<br />

[λh e : Given(h). does h] (movie) = 1 iff<br />

movie is given: when defined = 1 iff shoot movie<br />

At this point I do not know any principled way to block such a derivation. But the facts<br />

are clear: we want the G-operator to be able to adjoin to an extended projection, not to a<br />

100


lexical head. In a way, we want the operator to behave like a syntactic adjunct. 10<br />

(49) A G-operator cannot adjoin between a lexical head and its complement.<br />

<strong>The</strong> ban on adjoining the G-operator between a lexical head and its complement predicts<br />

that in the case <strong>of</strong> basic word order, anything except for the most embedded element can be<br />

given. This follows from the fact that there is no way to insert a G-operator so that it could<br />

scope over the most embedded element. This is a welcome prediction because an utterance<br />

in which everything is given is perceived as infelicitous. 11<br />

<strong>The</strong> question that arises is how the grammar knows where to introduce the G-operator.<br />

I argue that the operator’s distribution is determined by Maximize presupposition, repeated<br />

below.<br />

(50) Maximize Presupposition (after Heim (1991))<br />

In context C use the most informative presupposition satisfied in C.<br />

<strong>The</strong> consequence <strong>of</strong> the maxim is that the presuppositions we consider are scalar presuppositions.<br />

12 <strong>The</strong> reason is that the maxim requires the speaker to use the logical form which<br />

marks the strongest presupposition compatible with the common ground (Stalnaker, 1973,<br />

1974). <strong>The</strong> question is how we restrict the set <strong>of</strong> presuppositions that are relevant for a<br />

particular utterance. Recent proposals based on Maximize Presupposition, for example,<br />

Sauerland (2003) and Percus (2006) build the relevant set by replacing a lexical item with<br />

its scalar mates (Horn, 1972) within a fixed structure.<br />

Replacing scalar mates within a fixed syntactic structure would not, however, work in<br />

our case. I argue that if we want the maxim to regulate the distribution <strong>of</strong> the G-operator, the<br />

reference set must contain different syntactic (syntactic in the broad sense) derivations (see<br />

Reinhart (1995); Fox (1995); Reinhart (2006) for proposals using reference set computation<br />

over structures). 13 Thus, we need a definition <strong>of</strong> a reference set that would allow us to<br />

compare different structures with and without a G-operator. Such a definition is given in<br />

(51).<br />

10 This seems to be a reasonable assumption. While some languages might be able to adjoin their semantic<br />

operators to any syntactic element, others might be more restrictive. See, for example, Büring and Hartmann<br />

(2001), for arguments that while in English focus sensitive particles may be adjoined to any syntactic element,<br />

in German they can be adjoined only to a maximal verbal projection.<br />

11 Notice that we have just derived the fact that given elements do not bear the main sentential stress which<br />

in Czech falls on the rightmost prosodic word, which in turn corresponds to the most embedded part <strong>of</strong> a tree.<br />

I will comment on prosody versus givenness more in section 4.7. Notice also that in proposals based on focus<br />

projection or in cartographic approaches, the fact that anything except for the most embedded part <strong>of</strong> the tree<br />

can be given cannot be derived.<br />

12 I treat the Maximize presupposition maxim as a primitive but see Schlenker (2006) for arguments that<br />

it might be possible to derive the maxim from neo-Gracean reasoning, if we take into an account the notion<br />

<strong>of</strong> common belief <strong>of</strong> Stalnaker (2002). But as even Schlenker admits, the results are inconclusive. See<br />

also Magri (2007) for further arguments that Maximize Presupposition cannot be reduced to neo-Gracean<br />

reasoning.<br />

13 I assume that both Sauerland (2005) and Wagner (To appear) define their reference set as a set <strong>of</strong> derivations<br />

as well. Neither <strong>of</strong> them is explicit about this, though.<br />

101


(51) Reference set for Maximize Presupposition evaluation<br />

For the purposes <strong>of</strong> Maximize Presupposition, the reference set, toward which<br />

Maximize presupposition is evaluated, consists <strong>of</strong> all derivations<br />

a. that are based on the same numeration and free insertion <strong>of</strong> a G-operator, and<br />

b. that make the same assertion.<br />

I assume that the G-operator is not part <strong>of</strong> the numeration but it is a syncategoramatic operator<br />

which the semantic module can introduce without violating inclusiveness (for example,<br />

Chomsky (2000)). A crucial part <strong>of</strong> the proposal is that the semantic module has the capacity<br />

to license an otherwise illicit structure but only if there is no other way to achieve the<br />

desired interpretation (see also Fox (2000)). In our case, the illicit operation under discussion<br />

is G-movement. We have derived the fact that G-movement is allowed only if it affects<br />

the semantic interpretation. Now we can define the relevant condition more precisely.<br />

(52) Economy condition on G-movement:<br />

<strong>The</strong> only structure that is allowed is the structure that has the smallest number <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movements and leads to the relevant interpretation (i.e., assertion and presupposition).<br />

<strong>The</strong> new condition on G-movement has several welcome consequences. First <strong>of</strong> all, we<br />

no longer need to distinguish between movement <strong>of</strong> a head for givenness and movement<br />

<strong>of</strong> a head which facilitates G-movement. Under the current definition, the only thing that<br />

matters is whether the resulting structure allows insertion <strong>of</strong> a G-operator in a position that<br />

would not be available otherwise. Whether the movement affects a new or a given element<br />

is irrelevant. To see this, consider the following example and its derivation.<br />

(53) a. What about Petr?<br />

b. Petra || vítá Marie.<br />

Petr.Acc welcomes Marie.Nom<br />

‘Marie welcomes Petr.’<br />

Assuming that a T projection does not need to be inserted in the present tense, 14 the derivation<br />

proceeds as in (54). First, the given object moves over the verb, as in (54-a). <strong>The</strong>n<br />

the verb moves to v. Now the object needs to move again, (54-b). Notice that it is not<br />

possible to mark the object by a G-operator within VP: since VP is not <strong>of</strong> an atomic type,<br />

the operator would necessarily affect structurally higher material (the verb and the subject;<br />

the elements in the scope <strong>of</strong> a G-operator are marked by a box). After the object moves to<br />

vP, the subject is merged, (54-c). In principle the derivation might be able to stop here. <strong>The</strong><br />

problem is that, in this configuration, there is no position into which a G-operator could be<br />

inserted without marking the subject as given as well (which would lead to Presupposition<br />

failure). Thus, there is no choice other than to continue the derivation: the verb moves to<br />

T, the object moves to Spec,TP and a G-operator can finally be inserted in a position which<br />

satisfies Maximize presupposition without leading to Presupposition failure, (54-d).<br />

14 I assume a grammar in which a functional projection is projected only if it is associated with overt<br />

material or if it is selected by a higher head. Cf. for example Wurmbrand (2006, To appear).<br />

102


(54) a. VP<br />

Petr<br />

VP<br />

V<br />

t Petr<br />

b. vP<br />

Petr<br />

v-V<br />

vP<br />

t Petr<br />

VP<br />

*G<br />

VP<br />

t V t Petr<br />

c. vP<br />

Subject<br />

Petr<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

vP<br />

t Petr<br />

*G<br />

VP<br />

VP<br />

t V t Petr<br />

103


d. TP<br />

Petr<br />

G<br />

v-V<br />

TP<br />

Subject<br />

vP<br />

t Petr<br />

vP<br />

v-V<br />

vP<br />

VP<br />

t Petr<br />

t V<br />

̌G<br />

VP<br />

t Petr<br />

Thus, we can strengthen our previous claim in that there is no direct relation between being<br />

given or new and undergoing G-movement. Syntactic G-movement is free movement. It is<br />

only up to the semantic module to decide whether such movement is licensed or not.<br />

We are now in a position to understand why certain derivations cannot be improved by<br />

moving a phrase containing both given and new elements. Consider again example (14)<br />

from chapter 3, repeated below as (55).<br />

(55) a. What will happen to the book?<br />

b. Marie bude tu knihu dávat Petrovi.<br />

Marie.Nom will the book.Acc give.Inf Petr.Dat<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> question is why the whole VP cannot move as in (56). In such a derivation, no new<br />

element would asymmetrically c-command ‘book’. Thus, the partition between given and<br />

new would be perfect.<br />

(56) a. What will happen to the book?<br />

b. #[Tu knihu || dávat Petrovi] bude Marie.<br />

the book.Acc give.Inf Petr.Dat will Marie.Nom<br />

‘Marie will give the book to Peter.’<br />

104


c. TP<br />

VP<br />

book give to-Peter t book<br />

will<br />

TP<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

t V P<br />

But we already know that the perfect partition is irrelevant here. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the<br />

only place where the G-operator may be inserted is between ‘book’ and ‘give’, as in (57).<br />

Any other position would lead to Presupposition failure. <strong>The</strong> position is, however, already<br />

available after the object G-moves within VP. Moving the whole DP does not bring in any<br />

interpretation that would not already be available after the first instance <strong>of</strong> G-movement.<br />

<strong>The</strong>refore, G-movement <strong>of</strong> the whole VP is not licensed.<br />

(57) TP<br />

VP<br />

book G give to-Peter t book<br />

will<br />

TP<br />

vP<br />

Marie<br />

t V P<br />

<strong>The</strong> same reasoning accounts also for the assumption that a constituent containing several<br />

given elements may G-move only if it contains only given elements. If there were any new<br />

element, a G-operator would have to be inserted within the moving constituent, i.e., in the<br />

position in which it would have been inserted if the whole constituent did not undergo G-<br />

movement at all.<br />

Let’s summarize where we stand. We have an operator that can motivate given elements<br />

to be located in the left edge <strong>of</strong> its propositional domain and we know informally how the<br />

distribution <strong>of</strong> the operator can be regulated by the Maximize presupposition maxim. <strong>The</strong><br />

open question is what happens if there is more than one propositional domain per finite<br />

clause. <strong>The</strong> prediction is clear. In principle, any propositional domain might have its own<br />

G-operator in the same way as it can have an independent linear partition between given<br />

and new. Consider the example in (58).<br />

(58) Marie bude knihy prodávat<br />

Marie will books sell<br />

‘Marie will sell the books.’<br />

.<br />

105


<strong>The</strong> example in (58) is felicitous in the following two contexts:<br />

(59) Context I: only books given<br />

What will happen to the books?<br />

(60) Context II: everything given except for sell<br />

What will Marie do with the books?<br />

Thus, there is one syntactic structure that can be interpreted in two different ways. <strong>The</strong><br />

interpretations differ only in the number <strong>of</strong> G-operators in the structure. Either (i) there is<br />

only one operator, terminating at VP, or (ii) there are two different G-operators – one per<br />

propositional domain. 15<br />

(61) Context I: One G attached to the main spine:<br />

TP<br />

Mary<br />

T<br />

TP<br />

will<br />

vP<br />

books<br />

VP <br />

G<br />

terminating point<br />

VP<br />

VP<br />

sell t books<br />

(62) Context II: Two Gs attached to the main spine:<br />

terminating points<br />

TP <br />

Mary<br />

TP<br />

G<br />

TP<br />

T<br />

vP<br />

will<br />

VP <br />

books<br />

VP<br />

G<br />

VP<br />

sell<br />

t books<br />

15 I assume that ‘will’ is not marked for givenness, otherwise the structure would have to contain three<br />

G-operators.<br />

106


In the same way that there can be two separate G-operators, there can be two domains<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement. Thus, for example, there is no problem with having separate G-operators<br />

and separate G-movement in a matrix and in an embedded clause, as can be seen in (63).<br />

In this sentence, the given elements Petr and Marie are objects in two different clauses and<br />

they G-move within their clause, resulting in two independent partitions between given and<br />

new.<br />

(63) a. Do you know anything about Petr and Marie?<br />

b. Náhodou jsem slyšel, že Petrovi<br />

accidentally Aux.1sg heard that Petr.Dat<br />

Marii || zaměstnali v ABB.<br />

Marie.Acc employed.1pl in ABB<br />

|| říkala<br />

told<br />

nějaká<br />

some<br />

paní,<br />

lady<br />

že<br />

that<br />

‘I accidentally heard that some lady told Petr that Marie got employed in the<br />

ABB.’<br />

Similarly, in infinitival structures, some <strong>of</strong> the structurally higher elements can be given as<br />

well, or they can undergo G-movement, as in (64).<br />

(64) a. Do you know what Mary did with her famous boat?<br />

b. Marie || se pokusila lod’ || prodat.<br />

Marie REFL tried boat to-sell<br />

‘Marie tried to sell the boat (but no one wanted to buy it).’<br />

c. Marii || nařídil soud lod’ || prodat.<br />

Marie.Dat ordered court.Nom boat.Acc sell<br />

‘(You won’t believe it but) a court ordered Marie to sell the boat.’<br />

We can iterate the insertion <strong>of</strong> the G-operator even further, as in (65). In this case, one<br />

operator must be adjoined within the DP coordination (only one conjunct is given, not the<br />

whole coordination) and another operator is adjoined within the VP (below boat).<br />

(65) a. Do you know what Mary is planning to do with her broken boat?<br />

b. Marie || a nějaký automechanik budou lod’ || v létě opravovat.<br />

Marie and some car mechanic will boat in summer repair<br />

‘Marie and some car mechanic will repair the boat in the summer.’<br />

To summarize, we now have an informal way to characterize cases in which G-movement<br />

is licensed and we have a semantic operator which allows us to mark more than one G-<br />

element as presupposed. In the next section, I will develop a formal system which allows<br />

us to compare structures with respect to Maximize presupposition in a more precise way.<br />

Before we get to the next section notice that we have derived the size <strong>of</strong> a domain <strong>of</strong><br />

G-movement independently <strong>of</strong> head movement. <strong>The</strong> question is whether we still need the<br />

restriction on head movement or not. Also, it is not clear whether we can independently<br />

derive the fact that G-movement is very local.<br />

It looks like the head movement restriction only doubles the locality restriction imposed<br />

by the G-operator. Is this really true? Recall that the domain <strong>of</strong> G-movement varies in the<br />

107


past tense depending on the presence or absence <strong>of</strong> the auxiliary. <strong>The</strong> relevant examples<br />

are repeated below.<br />

(66) 3sg.:<br />

(67) 1pl.:<br />

a. What happened to the boat that got damaged in the last storm?<br />

b. Lod’ opravil jeden technik.<br />

boat.Acc repaired one technician.Nom<br />

‘A technician repaired the boat.’<br />

a. What happened to the boat that got damaged in the last storm?<br />

b. Jeden technik a já jsme lod’ opravili .<br />

one technician.Nom and I Aux.1pl boat.Acc repaired<br />

‘A technician and I repaired the boat.’<br />

I assume that example (66) is a vP, while the example in (67) corresponds to a TP. Even<br />

though this is a non-standard assumption it follows from the hypothesis that functional<br />

projections are merged only when needed. Thus it looks like that we could reduce the restrictions<br />

on G-movement to properties <strong>of</strong> the G-operator. But I hesitate to take this step.<br />

<strong>The</strong> reason is that, at this point, I do not have a good understanding <strong>of</strong> free syntactic movement.<br />

It may well be possible that for a language to have free syntactic movement, the<br />

language must also have flexible head movement. I thus leave the answer for future research.<br />

Another issue is whether we still need G-movement to be very local. I argue that this<br />

requirement is needed in order to derive word orders in which a given element is externally<br />

merged immediately above an internally merged given element. Such an example is<br />

repeated below.<br />

(68) a. How did the boy get the lollipop?<br />

b. Chlapec lízátko<br />

boy.Nom lollipop.Acc<br />

|| našel.<br />

found<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> boy found the lollipop.’<br />

(69) a. [ vP object verb [ V P t V t obj ] ]<br />

b. [ vP subject object verb [ V P t V t obj ] ]<br />

One might argue that, with respect to the G-operator, it is immaterial whether the object<br />

moves above the verb before or after the subject is merged. This is not true, however. <strong>The</strong><br />

difference lies in the position <strong>of</strong> the λ-abstract. If the object moves over the subject, the<br />

λ-abstract would have to be inserted between the subject and the object. As a result, the<br />

G-operator would terminate before it reached the object. Consider the structure in (70).<br />

108


(70) st<br />

terminating point<br />

object<br />

e,st<br />

λ<br />

st<br />

subject<br />

G . . .<br />

Thus if there is only one G-operator per propositional domain (which seems to be correct<br />

considering the nature <strong>of</strong> the G-operator, though this is hard to test), unless the object<br />

moves before the subject is merged the object could not be interpreted as presupposed. I<br />

therefore conclude that we need an independent requirement which prefers derivations with<br />

very local movement to derivations with a non-local G-movement.<br />

Another issue that has remained unanswered so far is when exactly the Maximize presupposition<br />

evaluation takes place. I assume that the evaluation may happen at the end <strong>of</strong><br />

a phase. This allows limitation <strong>of</strong> the global comparison only to structures which can be<br />

derived within a phase from the same numeration. I assume this is possible under the assumption<br />

that phases correspond to propositions. But nothing in our system depends on this<br />

choice. If it turns out that presuppositions are computed only at the level <strong>of</strong> the utterance,<br />

the system can be straightforwardly adjusted to that.<br />

4.3 <strong>The</strong> evaluation component<br />

In the previous section we have concentrated on defining a given operator and on introducing<br />

such an operator within the logical form. In this section, I will set up a formal<br />

evaluation component for the purposes <strong>of</strong> Maximize presupposition. This step will complete<br />

the modification <strong>of</strong> the originally purely syntactic system. In the rest <strong>of</strong> this section I<br />

will examine whether the modified system can account for the data from chapters 2 and 3<br />

that we originally covered by G-movement.<br />

To see exactly how the evaluation component works we need not only to define the reference<br />

set but also to have a clear metrics that we can use to compare different derivations.<br />

We already have a definition <strong>of</strong> a reference set. <strong>The</strong> definition is repeated below.<br />

(71) Reference set for Maximize Presupposition evaluation<br />

For purposes <strong>of</strong> Maximize Presupposition, the reference set, toward which Maximize<br />

presupposition is evaluated, consists <strong>of</strong> all derivations<br />

a. that are based on the same numeration and free insertion <strong>of</strong> a G-operator, and<br />

b. that make the same assertion.<br />

In order to have a clear metrics I will define two constraints with respect to which each<br />

candidate within a reference set will be evaluated. 16 First, we need to guarantee that all<br />

16 <strong>The</strong> reader should not be misled by the terminology. <strong>The</strong> system developed here is not an optimality<br />

109


derivations are syntactically well-formed. Such a condition is not strictly speaking a part <strong>of</strong><br />

the evaluation component, but it is a necessary precondition for a derivation to be considered<br />

for evaluation. <strong>The</strong> reason why the constraint belongs here, however, is that licensing<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement happens only at the interface.<br />

(72) SYNTAX:<br />

the reference set may contain only grammatically well-formed structures<br />

<strong>The</strong>n we need to guarantee that the relevant presupposition would be maximized. This<br />

requirement consists <strong>of</strong> the interaction <strong>of</strong> two separate requirements: (i) mark everything<br />

given as presupposed (make sure that each given element would give rise to the desired<br />

presupposition), and (ii) avoid marking new elements as presupposed (avoid Presupposition<br />

failure). I will call this constraint INTERPRETATION.<br />

(73) INTERPRETATION:<br />

a. a given element must be marked as presupposed (either lexically or by a G-<br />

operator) [≈ Maximize Presupposition]<br />

b. a new element cannot be marked as presupposed [≈ Presupposition Failure]<br />

We are now in a position to evaluate the system in place and see whether it can account<br />

for the facts we have considered so far. Let’s start with a simple case <strong>of</strong> a ditransitive<br />

construction in which everything is given except for the indirect object. Since in Czech<br />

a direct object follows an indirect object, it is enough if the direct object moves above<br />

the indirect object. <strong>The</strong> desired interpretation is given in (74). <strong>The</strong> boxes correspond<br />

to elements that we want to be interpreted as given; the structure is presented in the basic<br />

Czech word order. <strong>The</strong> relevant reference set is given in (75). I list here and in the following<br />

examples only a few candidates that are most relevant for the evaluation. <strong>The</strong> first candidate<br />

is a derivation in which no G-movement takes place and no G-operator is inserted, (75-a).<br />

<strong>The</strong> second candidate is a derivation with a G-operator inserted above the indirect object but<br />

with no G-movement, (75-b). <strong>The</strong> third candidate is a derivation with local G-movement <strong>of</strong><br />

the indirect object and a G-operator adjoined immediately below the moved object, (75-c).<br />

<strong>The</strong> last candidate differs from the previous candidate in that G-movement is not local, but<br />

instead the movement is cyclic and crosses several given elements, (75-d).<br />

(74) Desired interpretation:<br />

Peter gave to-Mary book .<br />

‘Peter gave the book to Mary.’<br />

(75) Reference set <strong>of</strong> (74):<br />

a. No G-operator and no movement:<br />

Peter gave to-Mary book<br />

b. G-operator and no movement:<br />

Peter gave G to-Mary book<br />

theoretic system. I am using the notion <strong>of</strong> constraints as a technical tool for explicit evaluation <strong>of</strong> derivations.<br />

In the end <strong>of</strong> the day we will see that for a structure to be felicitous in the relevant context no constraint may<br />

be violated.<br />

110


c. G-operator and local G-movement:<br />

Peter gave book G to-Mary<br />

d. G-operator and non-local G-movement:<br />

book gave Peter G to-Mary<br />

<strong>The</strong> evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set is schematized in (76). As we can see, the derivation<br />

without movement or any G-operator is syntactically well formed, but it fails with respect<br />

to the Maximize presupposition maxim (nothing is marked as presupposed). Similarly, the<br />

second candidate fails with respect to the maxim. Even though, this time, two given elements<br />

are correctly marked by the operator, there is one given element – the direct object –<br />

which remains unmarked. <strong>The</strong> third candidate, on the other hand, satisfies both the syntactic<br />

requirements as well as the pragmatic requirements. All given elements are marked and<br />

the syntax is well formed. <strong>The</strong> last candidate does well with respect to the interpretation<br />

but the syntax is not well-formed. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the derivation contains two instances<br />

<strong>of</strong> G-movement that cannot be licensed. As we can see by comparison with the candidate<br />

in (75-c), the desired interpretation is obtained without any additional movement. Since<br />

G-movement does not come for free, the candidate in (75-d) loses in comparison with the<br />

candidate in (75-c).<br />

(76) Evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set <strong>of</strong> (74):<br />

Reference set SYNTAX INTERPRETATION<br />

a. ̌ fails<br />

b. ̌ fails<br />

c. ̌ ̌<br />

d. fails ̌<br />

Let’s now consider a minimally different structure in which it is only the direct object<br />

which is given. All other elements are new in the discourse. <strong>The</strong> relevant reference set<br />

is given in (78). <strong>The</strong> candidates are the same as in the previous case, (74). <strong>The</strong>re is a<br />

candidate without G-movement and without any G-operator, (78-a), a candidate without<br />

G-movement and with a G-operator, (78-b), a candidate with local G-movement and a G-<br />

operator, (78-c), and finally a candidate with cyclic G-movement and a G-operator, (78-d).<br />

Again, only a few relevant candidates are considered.<br />

(77) Desired interpretation:<br />

Peter gave to-Mary book .<br />

‘Peter gave the book to Mary.’<br />

(78) Reference set <strong>of</strong> (77):<br />

a. No G-operator and no movement:<br />

Peter gave to-Mary book<br />

b. G-operator and no movement:<br />

111


Peter<br />

gave G to-Mary book<br />

c. G-operator and local G-movement:<br />

Peter gave book G to-Mary<br />

d. G-operator and non-local G-movement:<br />

book G gave Peter to-Mary<br />

<strong>The</strong> evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set in (78) is schematized in (79).<br />

(79) Evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set <strong>of</strong> (77):<br />

Reference set SYNTAX INTERPRETATION<br />

a. ̌ fails<br />

b. ̌ fails<br />

c. ̌ fails<br />

d. ̌ ̌<br />

<strong>The</strong> candidates in (78-a) and (78-b) pattern with the candidates in (75-a) and (75-b). Thus<br />

they fail because the direct object is not marked as given. <strong>The</strong> candidate in (78-c) is different:<br />

it is syntactically well-formed and the direct object is marked as presupposed. <strong>The</strong><br />

problem with this candidate is that the G-operator marks not only the direct object as presupposed<br />

but also the structurally higher new elements. <strong>The</strong> reason is that there is no early<br />

terminating point for the operator (the structure is in the past tense and there is no auxiliary).<br />

Thus, the object is forced to move above all the new elements. <strong>The</strong> cyclic G-movement is<br />

licensed in this case because the relevant interpretation is not available otherwise.<br />

Notice that while in the previous discussion we needed to refer to the presence <strong>of</strong> a new<br />

element asymmetrically c-commanding the given element, no such constraint is needed<br />

anymore. <strong>The</strong> locality <strong>of</strong> the movement is determined by terminating properties <strong>of</strong> the G-<br />

operator. To appreciate this point, consider the following case where only an object is given<br />

but in the same time, the object is blocked within an infinitive. <strong>The</strong> relevant reference set<br />

is given in (81).<br />

(80) Desired interpretation:<br />

Mary managed to-burn chair<br />

‘Mary managed to burn the chair.’<br />

(81) Reference set <strong>of</strong> (80):<br />

a. No G-operator and no movement:<br />

Mary managed to-burn chair<br />

b. G-operator and no movement:<br />

Mary managed to-burn G chair<br />

c. G-operator and local G-movement:<br />

112


Mary managed chair G to-burn<br />

d. G-operator and non-local G-movement:<br />

chair G managed Mary to-burn<br />

<strong>The</strong> reference set contains structures parallel to the reference sets for (74) and (77). Thus,<br />

there is again a candidate without G-movement and without any G-operator, (81-a), a candidate<br />

with a G-operator and no G-movement, (81-b), a candidate with local G-movement<br />

and a G-operator, (81-c), and finally a candidate with cyclic G-movement and a G-operator,<br />

(81-d).<br />

(82) Evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set <strong>of</strong> (80):<br />

Reference set SYNTAX INTERPRETATION<br />

a. ̌ fails<br />

b. ̌ fails<br />

c. ̌ ̌<br />

d. fails ̌<br />

As in the previous cases, the derivations without G-movement are not felicitous. <strong>The</strong> crucial<br />

pair <strong>of</strong> candidates to compare is the structure in (81-c) and the structure in (81-d). Even<br />

though the object is the only given element – thus this example patterns with (77) – , for<br />

the object to be interpreted as given it is enough to undergo only local G-movement. <strong>The</strong><br />

difference between the derivation <strong>of</strong> (77) and the derivation <strong>of</strong> (80) is in differing propositional<br />

domains at which the G-operator can terminate. In case the object is trapped within<br />

the infinitival VP, as in (80), the relevant propositional domain is the infinitival VP. Thus,<br />

local G-movement to the edge <strong>of</strong> the VP is enough for obtaining the correct interpretation.<br />

So far so good. But there is an alternative I would like to rule out, namely having the<br />

G-operator as the trigger <strong>of</strong> syntactic movement. If this were the case, for α to be given, α<br />

would always have to move to G. We have already seen examples <strong>of</strong> structures in which G-<br />

movement is blocked, such as coordination, which argued against treating the G-operator<br />

as a syntactic trigger in a Probe-goal sense. Other relevant structures to consider are structures<br />

in which no G-movement is required, i.e., basic word order structures.<br />

We have already seen in section 1.2 that in basic word order the partition between given<br />

and new can fall, in principle, at any position. Consider the example in (83) which lists the<br />

possible positions <strong>of</strong> the partition within a ditransitive clause with a temporal adverb.<br />

(83) a. Maruška včera dala dětem knihu.<br />

Maruška yesterday gave children book<br />

‘Yesterday Mary gave children a book.’<br />

b. Maruška || včera dala dětem knihu.<br />

c. Maruška včera || dala dětem knihu.<br />

113


d. Maruška včera dala || dětem knihu.<br />

e. Maruška včera dala dětem || knihu.<br />

As we can see, there are four possible partitions available. I argue that the partition<br />

positions correspond to positions in which the G-operator may be inserted. Thus, we now<br />

have a formal tool to understand the basic word order pattern. I argue that the exact position<br />

<strong>of</strong> the G-operator (or <strong>of</strong> several G-operators in case there is a terminating point somewhere<br />

in the structure) depends on what is presupposed. In other words, the insertion <strong>of</strong> a G-<br />

operator is regulated by the Maximize Presupposition maxim. If the wrong position is<br />

selected, either some given element will not be marked as presupposed or a new element<br />

will be incorrectly marked as presupposed.<br />

To see this in more detail, let’s consider a scenario in which the subject and the adverb<br />

are given, the rest is new (Tell me what Mary did yesterday.), (83-c). <strong>The</strong> relevant reference<br />

set is included in the evaluation table in (84).<br />

(84) Evaluation <strong>of</strong> the reference set <strong>of</strong> (83):<br />

Reference set SYNTAX INTERPRETATION<br />

Mary G yesterday gave children book ̌ fails<br />

Mary yesterday G gave children book ̌ ̌<br />

Mary yesterday gave G children book ̌ fails<br />

Mary yesterday gave children G book ̌ fails<br />

Since there is no G-movement, all candidates are syntactically well-formed. <strong>The</strong>re is, however,<br />

only one candidate which does well with respect to the Maximize presupposition<br />

maxim. <strong>The</strong> felicitous candidate is the candidate with a G-operator adjoined immediately<br />

below the adverb. Only this position guarantees that both the subject and the adverb will<br />

be presupposed and the rest <strong>of</strong> the clause will be understood as new. Notice that setting<br />

up the evaluation with respect to the Maximize Presupposition maxim is crucial here. For<br />

the structure to be correctly interpreted it is crucial to know what presupposition is to be<br />

matched. <strong>The</strong>re is nothing in the syntactic module that would have direct relevance for the<br />

position <strong>of</strong> the G-operator.<br />

To conclude, we have seen in detail the evaluation <strong>of</strong> several cases involving G-movement<br />

which were set up to test the hypothesis that to choose the right derivation it is enough to<br />

refer to the G-operator and to the Maximize presupposition maxim. As far as syntax is<br />

concerned, any well-formed derivation is possible as far as it is licensed by semantics (and<br />

pragmatics). Thus by modifying the syntactic system we do not lose anything. <strong>The</strong> question<br />

is whether we gained something in empirical coverage.<br />

4.4 <strong>The</strong> G-operator and coordination<br />

In the previous section we have seen that the modified system copes well with the G-<br />

movement data.<strong>The</strong> question is whether the system can account for coordination facts as<br />

114


well. Recall that there are two relevant restrictions to consider. (i) A given XP must precede<br />

a new XP in a coordination. (ii) A given VP can be trapped in a coordination even if it is<br />

asymmetrically c-commanded by new material. In contrast, a given DP is degraded in<br />

such a configuration and must be pronominalized. <strong>The</strong> crucial examples are repeated in<br />

(85)–(88). Given elements are in bold font. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> the data is schematized in<br />

(89).<br />

(85) Mary had some unpleasant experience with the new teacher and she did not want<br />

to go to the meeting only with her. In order to avoid any conflict,. . .<br />

a. #Pozvala učitelku a ředitelku. ←− # new > DP & DP<br />

invited.3sg.F teacher.Acc and director.Acc<br />

‘She invited the teacher and a director.’<br />

b. Pozvala ji a ředitelku.<br />

invited.3sg.F her.Acc and director.Acc<br />

‘She invited her and a director.’<br />

c. Pozvala tu učitelku a ředitelku.<br />

invited.3sg.F that teacher.Acc and director.Acc<br />

‘She invited that teacher and a director.’<br />

(86) A friend <strong>of</strong> mine has decided to change her lifestyle. She will read. . . ←− Context<br />

(87) A její přítel bude číst a překládat.←− new > VP & VP<br />

and her friend will read and translate<br />

‘And her boyfriend will read and translate.’<br />

(88) #A její přítel bude překládat a číst.←− # VP & VP<br />

and her friend will translate and read<br />

‘And her boyfriend will translate and read.’<br />

(89) a. #<br />

α New<br />

&P<br />

DP<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

DP<br />

b.<br />

α New<br />

&P<br />

VP<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

VP<br />

115


c. # &P<br />

XP<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

XP<br />

Let’s start with the case in (89-c), i.e., the restriction that a given conjunct must precede<br />

a new conjunct. <strong>The</strong> crucial point is that for an XP to be marked as presupposed, it must<br />

be an argument <strong>of</strong> a G-operator. <strong>The</strong> operator can be attached either (i) immediately above<br />

the given XP, or (ii) it can be attached to the whole coordination, or (iii) it can be attached<br />

below the first conjunct. <strong>The</strong> corresponding structures are given in (90). <strong>The</strong> elements in<br />

the scope <strong>of</strong> the operator are marked by boxes.<br />

(90) G-attachment within a coordination:<br />

a. immediately above the given XP:<br />

&P<br />

Conj1<br />

&P<br />

& G Conj2<br />

b. to the main clausal spine (to the whole coordination):<br />

&P<br />

G<br />

Conj1<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

Conj2<br />

c. immediately below the first conjunct:<br />

&P<br />

Conj1<br />

G<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

Conj2<br />

Let’s consider each case in turn. If the G-operator attaches above the second conjunct, as<br />

in (90-a), the SYNTAX constraint is satisfied but the INTERPRETATION constraint is violated<br />

because the given conjunct is not marked as presupposed while the new part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

coordination is marked as presupposed. Similarly, in (90-b), too many elements are marked<br />

as presupposed resulting in Presupposition failure. Attaching the G-operator immediately<br />

below the first conjunct does not help either, (90-c).<br />

116


<strong>The</strong>re is simply no way the G-operator could be inserted and the correct interpretation<br />

be obtained without violating either SYNTAX or INTERPRETATION. <strong>The</strong> only structure<br />

that satisfies both SYNTAX and INTERPREATION is the structure in which the given conjunct<br />

precedes the new conjunct and the G-operator is inserted immediately below the first<br />

conjunct, as in (91).<br />

(91) &P<br />

Conj1<br />

G<br />

&P<br />

&<br />

Conj2<br />

<strong>The</strong> evaluation <strong>of</strong> these possible structures is schematized in the table in (92).<br />

(92) Evaluation <strong>of</strong> [XP and XP]<br />

Reference set <strong>Syntax</strong> Interpretation<br />

(90-a) ̌ fails<br />

(90-b) ̌ fails<br />

(90-c) ̌ fails<br />

(91) ̌ ̌<br />

As we can see, the G-operator and the Maximize presupposition maxim can take care <strong>of</strong><br />

the fact that a given conjunct must precede a new conjunct.<br />

So far so good. Now we have an account <strong>of</strong> a subset <strong>of</strong> the restrictions on coordination,<br />

namely, the word order restriction within a coordination. <strong>The</strong> remaining question is<br />

why there is a difference between a DP and a VP coordination and why adverbs pattern<br />

partially with DPs and partially with VPs. We know that there is a way to mark a DP conjunct<br />

as presupposed in case there is no new material asymmetrically c-commanding the<br />

coordination. Thus, the problem does not lie in the marking itself but must be related to<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong> new material. We know that the presence <strong>of</strong> structurally higher new material<br />

does not matter in case a DP undergoes local G-movement. But in such a case, the<br />

DP is on the edge <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain. Based on this fact, I suggest that the difference<br />

between DP coordination and VP coordination is a difference in their semantic types.<br />

Since a DP coordination is not a propositional domain, the G-operator may escape from<br />

the coordination and mark the structurally higher new material as given as well. Thus, in<br />

case a DP coordination is not on the left edge <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain, marking the first<br />

conjunct with a G-operator is impossible because the scope <strong>of</strong> the operator would always<br />

affect a bigger structure, resulting in an infelicitous interpretation. <strong>The</strong> only way to avoid<br />

the problem <strong>of</strong> marking new material with the G-operator is to replace the given DP with<br />

a pronoun. Recall that pronouns do not need to be marked by the operator in order to be<br />

given. It is their lexical entry which gives rise to the required presupposition.<br />

117


<strong>The</strong>re is, however, one problem with the system in place. It is not clear how we can<br />

guarantee that the operator within a DP coordination does not mark the predicate the coordination<br />

combines with as presupposed. Everything depends on the semantic type we<br />

assume for a DP coordination. If we assume that a DP coordination is a generalized quantifier,<br />

then the G-operator would necessarily over-generate. On the other hand, if we assume<br />

that such a coordination is <strong>of</strong> type e, the operator cannot apply to the first conjunct because<br />

it is not defined for atomic semantic types. I suggest that the problem is avoided if we treat<br />

a DP coordination as a boolean coordination, i.e., a sum <strong>of</strong> individuals. I leave, however,<br />

the actual implementation for future research.<br />

In contrast to a DP coordination, a verbal coordination may be propositional. If this is<br />

the case, then there is no problem with adjoining the G-operator below the first conjunct.<br />

But can we safely assume that all relevant VP coordinations correspond to a proposition?<br />

Let’s consider again the example (1), repeated below as (94).<br />

(93) Many <strong>of</strong> my friends have recently decided to change their lifestyle. . .<br />

a. Tak jedna moje kamarádka bude víc číst. ←− context<br />

so one my friend will more read<br />

‘For example, a friend <strong>of</strong> mine will read more.’<br />

(94) A její přítel bude číst a překládat.<br />

and her friend will read and translate<br />

‘And her boyfriend will read and translate.’<br />

This case is straightforward because we know independently that the future tense auxiliary<br />

bude ‘will’ selects for a proposition. 17 <strong>The</strong> question is whether the same is true for other<br />

types <strong>of</strong> verbal coordinations. <strong>The</strong> most suspicious case is a coordination which is not<br />

selected by a tense auxiliary.<br />

(95) Many <strong>of</strong> my friends changed their lifestyle several years ago. . .<br />

a. Tak jedna moje kamarádka víc četla. ←− context<br />

so one my friend more read<br />

‘For example, a friend <strong>of</strong> mine read more.’<br />

(96) A její přítel četl a překládal.<br />

and her friend read and translated<br />

‘And her boyfriend read and translated.’<br />

Even though the examples in (94) and (96) look parallel, they are not. <strong>The</strong>re is a difference<br />

in their interpretation. <strong>The</strong> coordination <strong>of</strong> the future infinitives does not impose any<br />

requirement on the implicit object <strong>of</strong> reading and translating. In contrast, the past tense coordination<br />

requires the implicit objects to be identical. We can see the contrast on a possible<br />

continuation <strong>of</strong> the discourse in (94), given in (97), and the continuation <strong>of</strong> the discourse in<br />

(96), given in (98). While it is felicitous to say that he will read something different than<br />

he will translate, it is odd to say that he read something different than he translated.<br />

17 I put aside the option that the coordination is a coordination <strong>of</strong> something bigger than VP, i.e., a structure<br />

which originally contained the auxiliary.<br />

118


(97) a. And what will he read and translate?<br />

b. Bude číst detektivky a překládat romány.<br />

will-he read detective mysteries and translate novels<br />

‘He will read detective mysteries and translate novels.’<br />

(98) a. And what did he read and translate?<br />

b. #Četl detektivky a překládal romány.<br />

read detective mysteries and translated novels<br />

‘He read detective mysteries and translated novels.’<br />

I do not know at this point how to account for the difference between past and future.<br />

Intuitively, the past form <strong>of</strong> ‘read’ is not given in the same sense as the future form <strong>of</strong> ‘read’.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is something about the shared object that seems to make a difference for givenness.<br />

My hope is that these cases contain coordination reduction and the contrast between implicit<br />

objects in past and in future is related to a structural difference. I leave the question<br />

<strong>of</strong> differences among VP coordinations as a puzzle for future research.<br />

For now, let’s assume that verbal coordinations are <strong>of</strong> different types and that it is possible<br />

to reduce all relevant verbal coordinations to propositional domains. We can conclude<br />

that the G-operator can always be adjoined below the first verbal conjunct without leading<br />

to Presupposition failure.<br />

Notice that we have shifted our reasoning that the difference between nominal and verbal<br />

coordination is related to existence or non-existence <strong>of</strong> a pronominal counterpart. <strong>The</strong><br />

existence <strong>of</strong> a pronominal counterpart is relevant only in an indirect way. <strong>The</strong> reason why a<br />

verbal coordination asymmetrically c-commanded by new material is felicitous is not that<br />

there is no better tool to mark givenness. <strong>The</strong> reason is that such a coordination is a propositional<br />

domain. Thus, the G-operator can be safely inserted. <strong>The</strong> situation with coordinated<br />

DPs is rather different. <strong>The</strong>re is no way to insert the G-operator without Presupposition<br />

failure. Thus, invoking givenness lexically is the only grammatically suitable option the<br />

language has.<br />

What about adverbs? Recall that adverbs are sensitive to ordering within a coordination<br />

but they do not need to be pronominalized even if there is a pronominal counterpart available.<br />

I argue that adverbs can always be adjoined at a propositional level. Thus, an adverbial<br />

coordination is always located on the left edge <strong>of</strong> a propositional domain. <strong>The</strong>refore,<br />

inserting a G-operator below the first conjunct is always felicitous. <strong>The</strong>re is one problem<br />

remaining: we have defined the reference set as a set containing derivations based on the<br />

same numeration and the same assertion. Presumably, DPs and their pronominal counterparts<br />

are not part <strong>of</strong> the same numeration. Even though there might be a more principal<br />

solution <strong>of</strong> the problem, for now I will stipulate that pronouns may be part <strong>of</strong> the reference<br />

set as well. 18<br />

18 One option would be to treat pronouns as DP ellipsis, as has been suggested in Postal (1966) and further<br />

developed in Elbourne (2005).<br />

119


To sum up, we have seen that the G-operator that we need anyhow in order to mark<br />

presupposition does a lot <strong>of</strong> useful work for us. Now we have a system that can capture<br />

all the Czech data we have encountered so far. <strong>The</strong> only tools we need are G-movement,<br />

the G-operator and the assumption that the semantic component is able to compute global<br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> derivations.<br />

4.5 <strong>The</strong> interpretation <strong>of</strong> <strong>Givenness</strong><br />

In this chapter I have introduced a recursive G-operator whose purpose is to mark a part<br />

<strong>of</strong> a structure as presupposed. I have not, however, defined yet what it means to be given<br />

in a technical sense. <strong>The</strong> leading intuition is that given is something that is salient in the<br />

discourse and which gives rise to a presupposition that must be satisfied for the utterance<br />

to be felicitous in the relevant context.<br />

In principle we could adopt various definitions <strong>of</strong> givenness. I will adopt here Sauerland<br />

(2005)’s definition <strong>of</strong> givenness. <strong>The</strong> relevant lexical entries for type e and type et follow.<br />

(99) Lexical entry for Given <strong>of</strong> type e:<br />

Given g e ∃x & ∃i.g(i) = x<br />

= λx<br />

x<br />

(100) Lexical entry for Given <strong>of</strong> type et:<br />

where f has a salient antecedent in C<br />

Given = λf et ∃x ∈ De .f(x) = 1<br />

f<br />

If Given applies to an element <strong>of</strong> type < α,t >, Given presupposes the existential closure<br />

<strong>of</strong> the complement <strong>of</strong> Given. If Given applies to an element <strong>of</strong> type e, the lexical entry<br />

requires the element to be evaluated with respect to an assignment previously established<br />

in the discourse. As we will see in section 4.6 these lexical entries are too weak but I will<br />

stay with them for lack <strong>of</strong> a better alternative. To see how these lexical entries combine<br />

with our current system, consider the following example, after Sauerland (2005).<br />

(101) English version:<br />

a. Q: Who ate a cookie?<br />

b. A: LINA [ate a cookie]-Given<br />

(102) Czech version:<br />

a. Q: Kdo snědl koláček?<br />

who ate cookie?<br />

‘Who ate a/the cookie?’<br />

b. A: Koláček snědla || Lina.<br />

cookie ate Lina<br />

‘Lina ate a/the cookie.’<br />

120


In this case, the given part is ‘ate a/the cookie’. Let’s go step by step through the derivation<br />

and its interpretation. A simplified LF <strong>of</strong> the Czech sentence in (102-b) is given in (103).<br />

Basic lexical entries are given in (104).<br />

(103) E<br />

cookie<br />

D<br />

ate<br />

C<br />

G<br />

B<br />

8 A<br />

7 vP<br />

Lina<br />

VP<br />

(104) a. ate = λx.λy. y ate x<br />

b. Lina = lina<br />

c. cookie = cookie<br />

where lina and cookie are individuals<br />

t7 ate<br />

t8 cookie<br />

Let’s compute the semantics <strong>of</strong> the LF in (103) step by step, starting with the denotation <strong>of</strong><br />

VP and vP.<br />

(105) VP = λy. f 7 (x 8 )(y)<br />

(106) vP g = 1 iff<br />

[λy. f 7 (x 8 )(y)] (Lina) = 1 iff<br />

[λy. f 7 (x 8 )(y)] (lina) = 1 iff<br />

f 7 (x 8 )(lina)<br />

After taking into account lambda abstraction induced by G-movement <strong>of</strong> the object and the<br />

verb we get the following denotation.<br />

(107) B = λf 7 .λx 8 . f 7 (x 8 )(lina)<br />

Now the G-operator can take the constituent B as its argument because B is not <strong>of</strong> type t.<br />

<strong>The</strong> resulting denotation is given in (108). Notice that the G-operator applies in two steps.<br />

First, it induces that there is going to be a given function <strong>of</strong> type e,et. In the following step,<br />

the operator induces a given individual.<br />

(108) C = G(B) =<br />

G(λf 7 .λx 8 . f 7 (x 8 )(lina)) =<br />

λh e,et : Given(h). G ([λf 7 .λx 8 . f 7 (x 8 )(lina)](h)) =<br />

λh e,et : Given(h).G ([λx 8 . h(x 8 )(lina)]) =<br />

121


λg e .λh e,et : Given (g) & Given(h). G ([λx 8 . h(x 8 )(lina)](g)) =<br />

λg e .λh e,et : Given (g) & Given(h). G (h(g)(lina)) =<br />

λg e .λh e,et : Given (g) & Given(h). h(g)(lina)<br />

This constituent first combines with the verb ate, marking ate as given.<br />

(109) D = C (ate) =<br />

[λg e .λh e,et : Given (g) & Given(h). h(g)(lina)] (ate) =<br />

[λg e .λh e,et : Given (g) & Given(h). h(g)(lina)] (λw.λz. z ate w) =<br />

λg e : Given (g) & Given(ate). lina ate g<br />

In the next step, the structure combines with the object cookie, marking cookie as given.<br />

(110) E = D (cookie) = D(cookie) =<br />

[λg e : Given (g) & Given(ate). lina ate g](cookie) =<br />

Given(cookie) Given(ate): when defined = 1 iff lina ate cookie<br />

Let’s now explicate what Given(c) and Given(ate) mean, using the lexical entry from (99)<br />

and a slightly modified entry from (100). <strong>The</strong> reason we need to modify the entry is that<br />

the original entry is <strong>of</strong> type et but ate is <strong>of</strong> type e,et.<br />

(111) Given g (cookie) =<br />

[λh e : ∃h & ∃i.g(i) = h . h](cookie) =<br />

∃cookie & ∃i.g(i) = cookie . cookie<br />

(112) Given(ate) =<br />

[λf e,et : ∃x ∈ D e .∃y ∈ D e . f(y)(x) = 1 & f has a salient antecedent . f(y)(x)=1]<br />

(ate) =<br />

[λf e,et .∃x ∈ D e .∃y ∈ D e : f(y)(x) = 1 & f has a salient antecedent . f(y)(x)=1 :<br />

f] (λz.λw. w ate z) =<br />

∃w ∈ D e .∃z ∈ D e : w ate z = 1 & f has a salient antecedent . λz.λw. w ate z<br />

We can now insert these two denotations into the original derivation. <strong>The</strong> reader may wonder<br />

whether we get the right meaning if we treat givenness <strong>of</strong> ate and cookie separately.<br />

<strong>The</strong> intuition is that it is the whole constituent ate cookie that is given. <strong>The</strong> final meaning<br />

is that the sentence in (102-b) is true only if Lina ate a cookie and if the following presupposition<br />

is satisfied: there is someone who ate a cookie and the cookie has been previously<br />

introduced in the discourse. While the denotations combine by functional application, the<br />

presuppositions simply conjoin.<br />

(113) Given(cookie) & Given(ate) when defined = 1 iff lina ate cookie =<br />

(∃cookie & ∃i.g(i) = cookie)&(∃w ∈ D e .∃z ∈ D e : w ate z = 1 & f has a salient<br />

antecedent) when defined = 1 iff lina ate cookie<br />

I leave open for now whether this is the right meaning or whether the presupposition needs<br />

to be strengthened. We know that the weak meaning (conjunction <strong>of</strong> presuppositions) is<br />

sometimes needed but the open question is whether it is always sufficient.<br />

122


To sum up, we now have in place a formal system which can account both for syntax<br />

and semantics <strong>of</strong> givenness in Czech. In the following sections, I will address two remaining<br />

questions: First, what is the relation between givenness and deaccenting in English?<br />

Second, what is the role <strong>of</strong> phonology in the overall system?<br />

4.6 <strong>Givenness</strong> versus deaccentuation<br />

In the literature on givenness there is disagreement on how to define the exact semantic<br />

properties <strong>of</strong> givenness. 19 I have not addressed so far the question <strong>of</strong> how G-movement<br />

stands with respect to the conditions on givenness assumed for other languages. Since the<br />

literature on givenness is vast I will concentrate here on literature which explicitly argues<br />

for a direct relation between deaccentuation in English and givenness. This is a reasonable<br />

move because the literature arguing for givenness as the default information structure value<br />

(Schwarzschild, 1999; Krifka, 2001; Sauerland, 2005, among others) is based on the claim<br />

that an empirically more accurate theory <strong>of</strong> English prosody can be built if focus accenting<br />

is eliminated in favor <strong>of</strong> deaccenting given constituents. 20<br />

I will show in this section that the conditions on deaccenting are weaker than the conditions<br />

on G-movement. In other words, not everything that gets deaccented in English,<br />

G-moves in Czech. I will argue that for a Czech constituent α to be given and be able to<br />

G-move two conditions must be satisfied: (i) α must have a salient (contextually entailed)<br />

antecedent, and (ii) there must be an existential presupposition which α satisfies. On the<br />

other hand, in English, for an element to be deaccented it is enough that the element has<br />

a salient antecedent. <strong>The</strong> main argument will be based on the behavior <strong>of</strong> indefinites in<br />

Czech.<br />

Let’s start with Schwarzschild’s informal definition <strong>of</strong> givenness, in (114).<br />

(114) Definition <strong>of</strong> GIVEN (Schwarzschild 1999, p. 151, (25))<br />

An utterance U counts as GIVEN iff it has a salient antecedent A and<br />

a. if U is type e, then A and U corefer;<br />

b. otherwise: modulo ∃–type shifting, A entails the Existential F-closure <strong>of</strong> U.<br />

<strong>The</strong> question that arises is what it exactly means to have a salient antecedent. Consider the<br />

following English examples and the parallel Czech examples.<br />

(115) (Schwarzschild, 1999, p. 154, ex. (30))<br />

If a MAN owns a DONKEY, his WIFE owns a donkey.<br />

(116) a. Když muž vlastní OSLA, jeho žena vlastní OSLA.<br />

when man owns donkey his wife owns donkey<br />

‘If a man owns a donkey, his wife owns a donkey.’<br />

19 I thank Irene Heim for discussing the facts in this section with me and for helping me sort them out.<br />

20 But see Krifka (2006a) and Krifka (2006b) for arguments that not everything can be captured with a<br />

givenness-only theory.<br />

123


. #Když muž vlastní osla, osla vlastní jeho žena.<br />

when man owns donkey donkey owns his wife<br />

(117) In general, CHILDREN misbehave. But teachers only SOMETIMES punish<br />

children.<br />

(118) a. Jezevčíci jsou obvykle nevychovaní, ale jenom někdy<br />

dachshunds.Nom are usually misbehaved but only sometimes<br />

důchodci trestají JEZEVČÍKY.<br />

pensioners.Nom punish dachshunds.Acc<br />

‘Dachshunds usually misbehave but pensioners only sometimes punish dachshunds.’<br />

b. #Jezevčíci jsou obvykle nevychovaní, ale jezevčíky jenom<br />

dachshunds.Nom are usually misbehaved but only sometimes<br />

někdy trestají důchodci.<br />

dachshunds.Acc punish pensioners.Nom<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (115)–(118) contain existential indefinites. As we can see, in English, repetition<br />

<strong>of</strong> an existential indefinite is a sufficient condition for the indefinite to be deaccented.<br />

In fact, the indefinites must be deaccented. In contrast, in Czech, such an indefinite does<br />

not undergo G-movement. Furthermore, the indefinite carries the main sentential stress.<br />

Deaccentating is not possible.<br />

As the example in (119) demonstrates, in a non-generic context a plural DP like dachshunds<br />

may undergo G-movement. But if it undergoes G-movement then it is necessarily interpreted<br />

as a definite description. If there is no G-movement, as in (120), the second occurrence<br />

<strong>of</strong> dachshunds must be interpreted as a different group <strong>of</strong> dachshunds than those who<br />

were misbehaving.<br />

(119) Jezevčíci<br />

dachshunds.Nom<br />

trestají<br />

punish<br />

jsou<br />

are<br />

důchodci.<br />

pensioners.Nom<br />

někdy nevychovaní, a pak jezevčíky<br />

sometimes misbehaved and then dachshunds.Acc<br />

a. ‘Dachshunds sometimes misbehave and then pensioners punish the dachshunds.’<br />

b. #‘Dachshunds sometimes misbehave and then pensioners punish dachshunds.’<br />

(120) Jezevčíci jsou někdy nevychovaní, a pak důchodci<br />

dachshunds.Nom are sometimes misbehaved and then pensioners.Nom<br />

trestají jezevčíky.<br />

punish dachshunds.Acc<br />

a. ‘Dachshunds sometimes misbehave and then pensioners punish dachshunds.’<br />

b. #‘Dachshunds sometimes misbehave and then pensioners punish the dachshunds.’<br />

To summarize so far, existential indefinites do not G-move in Czech and they have no problem<br />

being accented in a position where an English existential indefinite must be deaccented.<br />

On the other hand, if a plural (recall that Czech does not have overt articles) undergoes G-<br />

movement, it must be interpreted as a definite description.<br />

124


Generic indefinites behave slightly differently than existential indefinites. <strong>The</strong>y do not<br />

undergo G-movement either, but they may be deaccented if something else needs to bear<br />

the main sentential stress. Consider the following examples containing hyponyms.<br />

(121) (Ladd, 1980)<br />

Q: Has John read Slaughterhouse-Five?<br />

A: He doesn’t READ books.<br />

(122) a. On knihy NEČTE.<br />

he books not-reads<br />

b. On NEČTE knihy.<br />

he not-reads books<br />

‘He doesn’t READ books.’<br />

(123) (Chafe, 1976)<br />

I bought a painting last week.<br />

I really LIKE paintings.<br />

(124) a. Já mám obrazy RÁD.<br />

I have paintings liked<br />

b. Já mám RÁD obrazy.<br />

I have liked paintings<br />

‘I really LIKE paintings.’<br />

In Czech as in English, the hyperonym primed by the previous context is deaccented. If we<br />

look more closely at the examples, we see, however, that they are rather different. Let’s first<br />

consider the example in (121). <strong>The</strong> answer in (121) is a correction to a proposition entailed<br />

by the question. <strong>The</strong> question about reading Slaughterhouse-Five entails an answer about<br />

reading books. 21 Corrections in general assert that an entailed (or asserted) proposition<br />

is not true. As a result, in this particular example, the negation carries focus accent as a<br />

means <strong>of</strong> excluding the entailed proposition from the set <strong>of</strong> propositions compatible with<br />

the common ground.<br />

On the other hand, the example in (123) does not contain any correction. <strong>The</strong> relevant<br />

utterance is an answer to an implicit question ‘Why do you buy paintings?’. 22 <strong>The</strong> implicit<br />

question primes the focus accent on the evaluative predicate like. Even though these two<br />

cases are not identical, they both contain a focused element that needs to be stressed. I<br />

argue that the fact that the generic indefinites are deaccented is not a property <strong>of</strong> the indefinites<br />

per se but is a consequence <strong>of</strong> their prosodic neighbor being stressed.<br />

If this conclusion is correct, we predict that if there is no focus, hyponyms cannot be<br />

deaccented. As we can see in (125), this is indeed correct. Thus, the fact that the generic<br />

indefinites in the previous examples are deaccented has nothing to do with them having a<br />

salient antecedent. Instead, the lack <strong>of</strong> sentential stress is a side-product <strong>of</strong> focusing the<br />

21 This follows only if an answer has the same implicature as the question.<br />

22 I thank Danny Fox, p.c., for suggesting that I treat these cases as containing an implicit question.<br />

125


immediately preceding prosodic word.<br />

(125) My son likes gorillas.<br />

a. In general, he likes ANIMALS.<br />

b. #In general, he LIKES animals.<br />

In section 4.7, I will argue that the short movement we observe in Czech is also the result<br />

<strong>of</strong> a prosodic requirement and has nothing to do with givenness. For now let’s consider the<br />

following example which shows that whatever triggers the displacement <strong>of</strong> the object in<br />

(122-a) and (124-a) is not G-movement. As we have seen in the previous chapters, a given<br />

element cannot be asymmetrically c-commanded by a new element within a propositional<br />

domain. If this is the case, the given element must move. As we can see in the example<br />

in (126), in case <strong>of</strong> generic indefinites accompanied by a focused element, the indefinites<br />

move only locally. Whether there is any new element or not is irrelevant for the movement.<br />

Thus, we can conclude that this kind <strong>of</strong> movement is not G-movement.<br />

(126) a. I bought a painting last week.<br />

b. Moje nová přítelkyně obrazy SBÍRÁ.<br />

my new girlfriend paintings collects<br />

‘My new girlfriend COLLECTS paintings.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> question is whether indefinites ever G-move. We have already seen several examples<br />

suggesting the opposite, but there seem to be some counterexamples. See, for instance, the<br />

example in (127) and (128).<br />

(127) Q: I’ve heard you finally sold all the used cars from your store. You also had<br />

several Porsches, right? Do you remember who bought a Porsche?<br />

A: Yes. For example, a FRIEND OF MY WIFE bought a Porsche.<br />

(128) a. Porsche si například koupil kamarád mojí<br />

Porsche REFL for example bought friend <strong>of</strong>-my<br />

‘For example, a friend <strong>of</strong> my wife bought a Porsche.’<br />

b. #Kamarád mojí ženy si například koupil<br />

friend <strong>of</strong>-my wife REFL for example bought<br />

ženy.<br />

wife<br />

Porsche.<br />

Porsche<br />

<strong>The</strong> example in (128) contrasts with the example in (130). In both utterances there is a<br />

salient antecedent but only in (128) does the indefinite move. What is the relevant difference?<br />

I want to suggest that the indefinite in (128) is semantically a partitive (a Porsche<br />

from the Porsches in the store). As such it triggers an existential presupposition, in contrast<br />

to the indefinite in (130) which cannot be interpreted as a partitive and therefore cannot<br />

give rise to an existential presupposition.<br />

(129) Q: Do you happen to know someone who owns a Porsche?<br />

A: Yes, a FRIEND OF MY WIFE owns a Porsche.<br />

(130) a. Kamarád mojí ženy má Porsche.<br />

friend <strong>of</strong>-my wife has Porsche<br />

‘A friend <strong>of</strong> my wife has a Porsche.’<br />

126


. #Porsche má kamarád mojí ženy.<br />

Porsche has friend <strong>of</strong>-my wife<br />

Notice that the partitive interpretation brings about a definite interpretation. <strong>The</strong>re is nothing<br />

in our semantics <strong>of</strong> givenness that would give us the partitive interpretation. <strong>The</strong> partitive<br />

semantics seems to be independent <strong>of</strong> givenness even though it is a precondition for<br />

an indefinite to be treated as given. I leave for future research how exactly givenness and<br />

partitivity interacts.<br />

Another problem that I leave unanswered is how we can restrict the existential presupposition<br />

only to the relevant quantificational domain. Presumably, it is part <strong>of</strong> our common<br />

background that Porsches exist but it is not enough for a Porsche to be given.<br />

An additional example showing the relation between an existential presupposition and<br />

the inability <strong>of</strong> an indefinite to undergo G-movement is given in (132).<br />

(131) I have entered Irene’s <strong>of</strong>fice and I see a Porsche key on her desk. I ask:<br />

a. Q: Who bought a Porsche?<br />

b. A: KAI bought a Porsche.<br />

(132) a. Kai si koupil<br />

Kai REFL bought<br />

‘Kai bought a Porsche.’<br />

b. #Porsche si koupil<br />

Porsche REFL koupil<br />

‘Kai bought a Porsche.’<br />

Porsche.<br />

Porsche<br />

Kai.<br />

Kai<br />

Why is there no movement in this example? Notice that there is a crucial difference between<br />

the example in (128) and the example in (132). In example (132) the existence <strong>of</strong> a<br />

Porsche is only entailed from the context. It has not been asserted that there is a Porsche<br />

that someone bought. Irene could have felicitously answered, for instance, ‘<strong>The</strong>re is no<br />

Porsche. I found the key.’<br />

Based on the examples with indefinites, I argue that having a salient antecedent is not<br />

a sufficient condition for treating an element in Czech as given. <strong>The</strong> condition must be<br />

strengthen by a requirement that a given element must give rise to an existential presupposition<br />

which is already part <strong>of</strong> the common ground. <strong>The</strong> new definition is given in (133).<br />

(133) Definition <strong>of</strong> GIVEN for Czech<br />

An utterance U counts as GIVEN iff<br />

a. it is presupposed that U exists, and<br />

b. it has a salient antecedent A<br />

(i) if U is type e, then A and U corefer;<br />

(ii) otherwise: modulo ∃–type shifting, A entails the Existential F-closure<br />

<strong>of</strong> U.<br />

Adding this condition explains why so many <strong>of</strong> the examples we have seen so far were<br />

127


translated by using a definite description. At the same time keeping the original requirement<br />

on a salient antecedent ensures that not every definite description will be treated as<br />

given. Consider the example in (134).<br />

(134) Král včera hrál šachy s královnou.<br />

king yesterday played chess with queen.<br />

‘<strong>The</strong> king and the queen played chess yesterday.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> example in (134) is a felicitous answer to the question ‘What happened?’ in a context<br />

where there is only one king and one queen in a palace. Even though ‘the queen’ is interpreted<br />

as definite, there is no G-movement. For ‘the queen’ to be able to G-move, there<br />

would have to be a salient antecedent like in the example in (135).<br />

(135) a. <strong>The</strong> queen was bored all day but then. . .<br />

b. s královnou hrál král šachy.<br />

with queen played king chess<br />

‘. . . the king played chess with the queen.’<br />

To summarize this section, I have provided an argument that, in Czech, for an element to be<br />

given (at least for purposes <strong>of</strong> G-movement) it is not enough to have a salient antecedent.<br />

A stronger semantic condition is required. Specifically, I have argued that for an element<br />

to be interpreted as given the element must give rise to an existential presupposition. Thus,<br />

the semantic condition on being given in Czech is stronger than the condition on being<br />

deaccented in English.<br />

4.7 A note on phonology and its relation to givenness<br />

Superficially, Czech behaves like languages that require a new element to occupy the most<br />

embedded part <strong>of</strong> the tree in order to be assigned nuclear stress (Cinque, 1993; Zubizarreta,<br />

1998; Arregui-Urbina, 2002; Szendrői, 2003). One may wonder whether we are losing<br />

something if we do not refer to phonology at all in the treatment <strong>of</strong> givenness in Czech.<br />

In this section, I will briefly address this question. I will first review the basics <strong>of</strong> Czech<br />

sentential prosody. <strong>The</strong>n, I will show a couple <strong>of</strong> cases where elements move in order to<br />

satisfy their prosodic requirement. I will argue that this kind <strong>of</strong> movement is different from<br />

G-movement. Finally, I will briefly address the question <strong>of</strong> abstract phonology as a trigger<br />

<strong>of</strong> syntactic movement.<br />

Main sentential prominence in Czech is realized on the first syllable <strong>of</strong> the last prosodic<br />

word (cf. Gebauer 1900; Skaličková 1956; Daneš 1957; Romportl 1973; Palková 1994,<br />

among others). 23 Czech, in contrast to English, does not realize sentential prominence with<br />

a high tone. Instead, prominence is realized by increased intensity and longer duration. 24<br />

23 For further discussion on the Czech sentential prosody and its relation to information structure see Mathesius<br />

1931, 1937; Trávníček 1937, 1939; Petřík 1938; Petr et al. 1986, among others.<br />

24 It is, however, possible that what is perceived as prosodic prominence is a high tone on the stressed<br />

syllable <strong>of</strong> the last prosodic word followed by a low tone (Edward Flemming, p.c.).<br />

128


<strong>The</strong> position <strong>of</strong> the sentential stress falls on the main word stress. Main word stress falls<br />

on the initial syllable <strong>of</strong> a prosodic word. In general, odd-numbered syllables are stressed,<br />

giving rise to trochaic rhythm. For an overview <strong>of</strong> word stress in Czech see van der Hulst<br />

1999, p. 818ff.<br />

Ladd 1996 argues that Czech is a language that does not use pitch accent at all and that<br />

has very rigid phonology. This is significant in light <strong>of</strong> the hypothesis that syntax must<br />

adjust to phonology because phonology is not a ‘plastic’ component <strong>of</strong> the grammar (cf.<br />

Vallduví 1990). 25 This picture is, however, too simplistic. Czech has other prosodic means<br />

than assigning nuclear stress to the last prosodic word. For example, contrastively focused<br />

words may be prosodically prominent in situ. Also certain lexical items, for instance whwords,<br />

are independently prosodicaly prominent. But it is true that Czech prosody is more<br />

rigid than the prosody <strong>of</strong>, for example, English. Thus, we cannot exclude in advance the<br />

possibility that syntax accommodates prosodic requirements.<br />

<strong>The</strong> important question with respect to givenness is whether there is a direct relation<br />

between being given and deaccenting. We have already seen in the previous section that<br />

the semantic licensing conditions on givenness are stronger than the licensing conditions<br />

on deaccenting in English, but there is still a possibility that for an element to be given in<br />

Czech, the element must be deaccented. Thus, the question is whether or not G-movement<br />

may be characterized as prosodically driven movement.<br />

To be able to answer this question, let’s first identify another type <strong>of</strong> prosody driven<br />

movement in Czech. Such movement is found with inherently stress-less items, for instance<br />

něco ‘something’. As we can see in (136), ‘something’ cannot be the last prosodic<br />

word. <strong>The</strong> reason is that in this position it would bear the main sentential stress. Crucially,<br />

destressing ‘something’ in situ is not possible.<br />

(136) a. *Chtěla bych jíst něco.<br />

wanted would eat.Inf something<br />

b. Chtěla bych něco jíst .<br />

wanted would something eat<br />

‘I would like to eat something.’<br />

As we can see in the example in (137), the movement observed in (136) is not independent<br />

syntactic movement. If we modify the sentence in (136) with a VP adverbial which<br />

surfaces as the last prosodic word, ‘something’ does not need to move anymore. In fact, it<br />

cannot move. <strong>The</strong> reason is that now it is the adverbial that bears the main sentential stress.<br />

‘Something’ is not affected by the sentential prominence.<br />

(137) a. Chtěla bych jíst něco u Nováků.<br />

wanted would eat.Inf something at Novak’s<br />

b. *Chtěla bych něco jíst u Nováků.<br />

wanted would something eat at Novak’s<br />

25 Czech is supposed to pattern in this respect with languages like Italian and Hungarian.<br />

129


‘I would like to eat something at Novak’s.’<br />

Furthermore, other lexical items that are semantically similar but at the same time can be<br />

stressed, such as ‘some food’, do not move, as can be seen in (138).<br />

(138) a. Chtěl bych jíst nějaké jídlo.<br />

wanted would.1sg eat.Inf some food<br />

‘I would like to eat some food.’<br />

b. Chtěl bych jíst polévku.<br />

wanted would.1sg eat.Inf soup<br />

‘I would like to eat some soup.’<br />

To summarize the observations so far, in Czech sentential prominence is realized only on<br />

the last prosodic word. For an element to be deaccented it is enough to move very locally.<br />

No cyclic movement is required (or licensed).<br />

I have already mentioned that in certain cases it is possible to realize prominence in a<br />

different part <strong>of</strong> the structure as well. For instance, if something is contrastively stressed,<br />

the immediately preceding prosodic word is deaccented. Thus, we predict that a stress-less<br />

word like ‘something’ does not need to evacuate the last position if the preceding word is<br />

contrastively stressed. This is indeed correct, as we can see in (139).<br />

(139) Chci JÍST něco. Ne, PÍT něco.<br />

want-I to-eat something no to-drink something<br />

‘I want to EAT something, not to DRINK something.’<br />

In general, there is an optionality in whether the contrastive element is stressed in situ or<br />

whether the contrastive element is realized as the last prosodic word, as in (140).<br />

(140) Chci něco JÍST, ne PÍT.<br />

want-I something to-eat no to-drink<br />

‘I want to EAT something not to DRINK something.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples in (139) and (140) are similar to the deaccented examples with hyponyms<br />

from the previous section. Consider again the example from (124) repeated below as (141).<br />

If the contrasted predicate ‘like’ stays in situ, as in (141-b), it gets stressed and the following<br />

prosodic word ‘paintings’ get deaccented. On the other hand, if the object ‘paintings’<br />

undergoes short movement, the predicate is assigned the main sentential stress.<br />

(141) a. Já mám obrazy RÁD.<br />

I have paintings liked<br />

b. Já mám RÁD obrazy.<br />

I have liked paintings<br />

‘I really LIKE paintings.’<br />

Notice that Czech does not seem to have the option <strong>of</strong> deaccenting an element by shifting<br />

the main sentential stress. <strong>The</strong> only way something can become deaccented is if its immediately<br />

preceding prosodic neighbor is independently stressed. <strong>The</strong> question that arises<br />

130


is whether English givenness is really so different from Czech. As far as I can tell, it is<br />

quite possible that deaccenting by shifting stress is licensed under the same conditions as<br />

G-movement in Czech. Other deaccenting cases might be a result <strong>of</strong> destressing caused by<br />

stressing <strong>of</strong> the immediately preceding prosodic neighbor. But whether this is a plausible<br />

theory or not must be left for future research.<br />

To conclude, we have identified a type <strong>of</strong> movement which is purely driven by prosodic<br />

requirements. We can now ask the question whether G-movement is the same type <strong>of</strong><br />

movement or not. If G-movement is motivated by prosody in the same way as the movement<br />

observed above, then there are two logical options to be considered: either (i) given<br />

elements cannot be stressed, i.e., they move in order to not bear nuclear stress, or (ii) new<br />

elements move to the position in which they would be marked by nuclear stress.<br />

Neither <strong>of</strong> these two options seems to be correct. We know from the behavior <strong>of</strong> ‘something’<br />

that for a word not to be stressed it is enough to move very locally. G-movement, on<br />

the other hand, may be cyclic and non-local, thus, option (i) cannot be correct. Similarly, if<br />

a new element needs to bear a nuclear stress, there is only one position that is good enough.<br />

Again, we would expect different behavior than the behavior we find. We would expect<br />

that any structure in which one new element would be the last prosodic word should be<br />

well formed, which is not correct. To conclude, option (ii) cannot be maintained either.<br />

<strong>The</strong> more interesting question is whether a prosodic account <strong>of</strong> givenness in Czech<br />

could be maintained if we considered a more sophisticated abstract version <strong>of</strong> the nuclear<br />

stress rule. My worry is whether it is possible to establish such a rule without referring to<br />

the semantic properties <strong>of</strong> the relevant elements. Recall from our previous discussion that<br />

the partition between given and new may appear in different parts <strong>of</strong> the tree. Furthermore,<br />

it is sensitive to the propositional complexity <strong>of</strong> an utterance. Once we need to refer to<br />

the semantic values then it is not clear what the advantage <strong>of</strong> having a prosodically driven<br />

system would be. <strong>The</strong> system would necessarily double the work <strong>of</strong> the semantic and pragmatic<br />

components.<br />

Recent accounts <strong>of</strong> information structure in terms <strong>of</strong> the syntax-phonology interface,<br />

such as Selkirk (1995), Reinhart (1995, 2006) or Szendrői (2003), do indeed use some<br />

form <strong>of</strong> semantic diacritics that they introduce into the derivation. Even though my account<br />

is very close to the syntax-prosody accounts, it is simpler in that it minimizes the<br />

inter-modular interaction. <strong>The</strong> only thing we need is syntax generating free movement<br />

and semantics choosing from syntactically available structures. <strong>The</strong> only task left for<br />

the phonology interface is to read <strong>of</strong>f the syntactic interpretation by using independently<br />

needed prosodic rules. 26<br />

26 Such a prosodic system is for example that <strong>of</strong> Wagner (2005).<br />

131


4.8 Summary<br />

This chapter completed the previous discussion <strong>of</strong> the syntax <strong>of</strong> G-movement by creating a<br />

system <strong>of</strong> semantic interpretation which both improves the coverage <strong>of</strong> the syntactic system<br />

and provides an explanation for the empirical generalizations made in the previous chapters.<br />

In particular, I argued that G-movement is movement with semantic consequences in<br />

the sense that syntactic items move in order to create a linear partition between elements<br />

to be interpreted as given and elements to be interpreted as new. We saw that the same<br />

partition can be established not only by G-movement but also by base generation as in the<br />

case <strong>of</strong> coordinations and basic word orders. I argued that the purpose <strong>of</strong> the partition is to<br />

create a configuration in which it is possible to insert a given operator.<br />

I argued that in order to account for the Czech data we need a recursive operator which<br />

applies to a non-propositional constituent and turns its sister into a presuposed element.<br />

I proposed that the distribution <strong>of</strong> the operator should be governed within a comparative<br />

system which compares derivations with respect to the Maximize Presupposition maxim <strong>of</strong><br />

Heim (1991). I proposed that the evaluation is done over a set which contains derivations<br />

based on the same numeration and assertion. We saw that the combination <strong>of</strong> the given<br />

operator and the evaluation component captures all the relevant data.<br />

In the final two sections I addressed the question <strong>of</strong> how G-movement relates to deaccenting<br />

for givenness in English. I showed that the licensing conditions on G-movement are<br />

stronger in that they require that, for an element to be given, it must not only have a salient<br />

antecedent but also be existentially presupposed. In the last section I shortly commented<br />

on a worry that we might be losing an important generalization if we do not give any role<br />

to phonology in our system. I argued that this move is indeed harmless: with respect to<br />

givenness, the phonology component behaves only as an interpretative component.<br />

132


Appendix A<br />

G-movement is A-movement<br />

To complete the overall picture <strong>of</strong> the properties <strong>of</strong> G-movement I will address in this<br />

appendix the question <strong>of</strong> whether G-movement is A-movement or A-bar movement. In<br />

particular, I will argue that G-movement is A-movement in the sense that it creates a new<br />

binding configuration. But first I will define what I mean by the A- versus A-bar distinction.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re has been disagreement in the literature about classifying scrambling as A-movement<br />

or A-bar movement. <strong>The</strong> disagreement lies in how we define the distinction between A-<br />

and A-bar movement in the first place. For approaches that base the distinction on Case assignment,<br />

there are two basic options: Either (i) only a DP that is assigned Nominative can<br />

move to Spec, TP since T assigns Nominative Case; thus, scrambling <strong>of</strong> a non-Nominative<br />

DP is by definition movement to a position higher than Spec,TP and must be an instance<br />

<strong>of</strong> A-bar movement (cf. for example Baker (2003)). Or, (ii) a position like Spec,TP may<br />

be ambiguous between A-movement and A-bar movement depending on whether the DP<br />

that moves there is or is not nominative (see, for example, Bonet (1990); Diesing (1990);<br />

Mahajan (1990)).<br />

On the other hand, it has been argued that A movement and A-bar movement behave<br />

differently with respect to binding (Lebeaux (1988, 1998); Saito (1989); Mahajan (1990);<br />

Chomsky (1993, 1995); Fox (1999); Lasnik (1999)). I will adopt here the binding distinction<br />

over the Case distinction. I will classify as A-movement only movement, where the<br />

pronounced copy is relevant for binding, and as A-bar movement movement where the pronounced<br />

copy is not relevant for binding. 1 It is outside <strong>of</strong> the scope <strong>of</strong> this work to explain<br />

why there should be such a difference between A- and A-bar movement. 2<br />

In particular, I will follow recent proposals for Russian (see Lavine and Freidin (2002);<br />

Bailyn (2003, 2004), among others) that movement to Spec,TP in Russian, even if it is<br />

movement <strong>of</strong> an object, is always A-movement, i.e., it creates a new binding configuration.<br />

1 I simplify the discussion here. It has been argued that A-movement can reconstruct as well (see, for example,<br />

an overview in Iatridou 2002). <strong>The</strong> question <strong>of</strong> reconstruction is immaterial for the current discussion.<br />

<strong>The</strong> only relevant difference is whether the pronounced copy counts for binding or not.<br />

2 One option is that being A- or A-bar follows from a feature composition <strong>of</strong> a particular projection, not<br />

from the type <strong>of</strong> a projection per se. See Nevins and Anand 2003 for an idea in this direction.<br />

133


As we will see below, the same holds for G-movement. <strong>The</strong> examples in the following<br />

sections will partially be modeled after Lavine and Freidin (2002); Bailyn (2004).<br />

Notice that once we tie the A- versus A-bar distinction only to binding, it becomes<br />

non-trivial to distinguish between movement and base generation. If G-elements were base<br />

generated on the left periphery, i.e., they would be something like clitic left dislocation<br />

in Romance (for example, Cinque 1990; Iatridou 1995; Barbosa 1995), we would not be<br />

able to tell from the binding interactions. I will comment on base generation in section A.4.<br />

<strong>The</strong> argument for A-movement properties <strong>of</strong> G-movement to Spec,TP is based on binding<br />

interactions, in particular on Condition A, Condition C, and Weak Cross-Over effects.<br />

I am not using other tests for absence <strong>of</strong> A-bar movement used in Cinque 1990; Iatridou<br />

1995; Barbosa 1995. <strong>The</strong> reason is that most <strong>of</strong> the tests are based on the absence or the<br />

presence <strong>of</strong> a clitic. <strong>The</strong>re is no clitic in G-movement constructions in Czech. However,<br />

as we will see in section A.4 there are constructions that are more similar to clitic left dislocation<br />

in Romance. For closer discussion <strong>of</strong> these and their relation to contrastive left<br />

dislocation see Sturgeon 2006. Thus, in the following sections I will argue for (1).<br />

(1) G-movement is A-movement.<br />

A.1 Condition A<br />

Let’s start by looking at Condition A. <strong>The</strong> condition is given in (2).<br />

(2) Condition A:<br />

A reflexive (or reciprocal) pronoun must be bound within its local domain.<br />

If G-movement is A-movement, G-movement <strong>of</strong> a DP containing a reflexive pronoun over<br />

its binder, should lead to a Condition A violation. On the other hand, we predict that if<br />

G-movement is A-bar movement, it should not affect the ability <strong>of</strong> the reflexive pronoun to<br />

be bound.<br />

Even though the predictions are clear, testing for Condition A in Czech is not a straightforward<br />

task. <strong>The</strong> reason is that Czech has anaphoric reflexive pronouns that are always<br />

bound by a Nominative argument. As the following examples show, binding <strong>of</strong> reflexive<br />

pronouns is independent <strong>of</strong> the actual structural relation between the anaphor and its<br />

binder. 3<br />

(3) Nom-Acc verbs:<br />

a. Marie má ráda svoji kočku.<br />

Marie.Nom-i has liked her-i cat<br />

3 Examples with sebe ‘oneself’ are not presented as minimal pairs. <strong>The</strong> reason is that the given counterpart<br />

<strong>of</strong> sebe is lexicalized as a reflexive second position clitic that never occupies Spec,TP. Focusing the object by<br />

association with jenom ‘only’ gives us the desired interpretation in a way that avoids the problem with using<br />

the clitic.<br />

134


. Svoji kočku má ráda Marie.<br />

her-i cat.Acc has liked Marie.Nom<br />

‘Marie likes her cat.’<br />

(4) Nom-Locative:<br />

a. Petr bydlel ve svém domě.<br />

Petr.Nom-i lived in his-i house.Loc<br />

b. Ve svém domě bydlel jenom Petr.<br />

in his-i house lived only Petr-i<br />

‘(Only) Petr lived in his own house.’<br />

(5) Nom-Acc:<br />

a. Petr viděl sebe.<br />

Petr.Nom saw himself<br />

b. Sebe viděl jenom Petr.<br />

himself saw only Petr<br />

‘(Only) Petr saw himself.’<br />

(6) Ditransitive verbs:<br />

a. Petr dal svému bratrovi knihu.<br />

Petr.Nom-i gave his-i brother.Dat book.Acc<br />

b. Svému bratrovi dal Petr knihu.<br />

his-i brother.Dat gave Petr.Nom book.Acc<br />

‘Petr gave his brother a book.’<br />

(7) Ditransitive verbs:<br />

a. Petr dal bratrovi svou knihu.<br />

Petr.Nom-i gave brother.Dat his-i book.Acc<br />

b. Svou knihu dal Petr bratrovi.<br />

his-i book.Acc gave Petr.Nom brother.Dat<br />

‘Petr gave his book to (his) brother.’<br />

Fortunately, the facts are different if the binder is a quirky subject, i.e., a Dative argument.<br />

In such a case, binding is possible only if the Dative is in the subject position (Spec, TP);<br />

otherwise, violation <strong>of</strong> Condition A arises. 4<br />

(8) Dative subject:<br />

a. ?Máše bylo líto svého psa.<br />

Máša.Dat-i was sorry her-i dog.Gen<br />

b. *Svého psa bylo líto Máše.<br />

her-i dog.Gen was sorry Máša.Dat-i<br />

‘Máša felt sorry for her dog.’<br />

(9) Dative subject:<br />

4 To my knowledge, the asymmetry between Nominative and Dative subject has not been reported in<br />

literature yet. I have no explanation for the binding difference.<br />

135


a. Máši bylo líto sebe.<br />

Máša.Dat was sorry herself.Gen<br />

b. *Sebe bylo líto Máši.<br />

herfself.Gen was sorry Máša.Dat<br />

‘Máša felt sorry for herself.’<br />

We see that G-movement causes a Condition A violation, suggesting that G-movement is<br />

A-movement.<br />

Further evidence comes from possessive pronouns that are anaphorically bound by a<br />

non-subject element but are not morphologically marked as reflexive. Consider the examples<br />

in (10) and (11). 5<br />

(10) a. *Její kočka má ráda Marii.<br />

her-i cat.Nom has liked Marie.Acc-i<br />

b. Marii má ráda její kočka.<br />

Marie.Acc-i has liked her-i cat.Nom<br />

‘Mary is loved by her cat.’<br />

(11) a. ??Jeho přátelé obdivují Petra.<br />

his-i frinds.Nom admire Petr.Acc-i<br />

b. Petra obdivují jeho přátelé.<br />

Petr.Acc-i admire his-i friends.Nom<br />

‘His friends admire Petr.’<br />

As we can see, such a possessive pronoun is felicitous only if the R-expression coindexed<br />

with the pronoun undergoes G-movement over the pronoun. Thus, the R-expression is in<br />

a position from which it can bind. It follows that the position must be an A-position and<br />

G-movement is A-movement. 6<br />

A.2 Condition C<br />

This section will comment on Condition C. <strong>The</strong> Condition C is defined in (12).<br />

(12) Condition C:<br />

An R-expression (= proper name or definite description) must be free.<br />

What kind <strong>of</strong> interactions do we expect with respect to G-movement and Condition C?<br />

First <strong>of</strong> all we need to establish that Czech is sensitive to Condition C. I will show this<br />

5 <strong>The</strong>re is a difference in the level <strong>of</strong> unacceptability between the examples in (10) and (11). David<br />

Pesetsky, p.c., suggested that the difference in acceptability might come from inaliable versus non-inaliable<br />

possession relations. At this point I do not have an explanation for the gradient differences in judgments.<br />

For now, however, the crucial point is that there is a consistent difference depending on c-command relations<br />

between relevant pairs <strong>of</strong> arguments.<br />

6 As David Pesetsky, p.c., pointed out, the argument is not conclusive because the same result in grammaticality<br />

would be captured by a theory relying only on linear precedence. Even though this objection is<br />

relevant with respect to Condition A, it does not apply to other binding facts presented at this section.<br />

136


with movement <strong>of</strong> a pronoun over a coindexed R-expression. If such a pronoun moves<br />

over a coindexed R-expression, it should cause a Condition C violation. <strong>The</strong> reason is that<br />

A-movement creates a new binding position. If the pronoun undergoes A-movement, it<br />

binds from its surface position. On the other hand, if the pronoun undergoes A-bar movement,<br />

Condition C would not be violated because the pronoun would be able to reconstruct.<br />

I will demonstrate the interaction with OVS examples. Before we approach the actual<br />

test, a note on an OVS order is required. In an OVS order, there are two available parses for<br />

the position <strong>of</strong> the object. (i) the object can occupy an A-position, or (ii) it can occupy an<br />

A-bar position. I argue that these two positions differ in two aspects: (i) they have different<br />

intonational contours (an element in an A-bar position is contrastively stressed and the<br />

following material gets deaccented; no such change in the intonational contour is observed<br />

with A-position); (ii) in cases without contrastive stress and deaccenting the verb must<br />

linearly precede the subject; as for the other type, the verb can either precede or follow the<br />

subject (capitalized letters mark contrastive stress). Thus, if there is an optionality between<br />

OVS and OSV order then the object could have not undergone A-movement.<br />

(13) Non-contrastive intonation:<br />

a. Petra viděla Marie.<br />

Petr.Acc saw Marie.Nom<br />

b. *Petra Marie viděla.<br />

Petr.Acc Marie.Nom saw<br />

‘Marie saw Peter.’<br />

(14) Contrastive intonation:<br />

a. PETra viděla Marie.<br />

Petr.Acc saw Marie.Nom<br />

b. PETra Marie viděla.<br />

Petr.Acc Marie.Nom saw<br />

‘It was Peter whom Marie saw.’<br />

I suggest that the non-contrastive type corresponds to A-position, i.e., Spec,TP. <strong>The</strong> obligatory<br />

OVS order is a result <strong>of</strong> moving the object to Spec, TP and leaving the subject lower in<br />

the structure (presumably within vP; for a similar argument see, for example, Bonet 1990;<br />

Diesing 1990; Miyagawa 1997; Bailyn 2003, 2004). On the other hand, the contrastive<br />

pattern corresponds to A-bar movement, i.e., to movement to a position higher than Spec,<br />

TP. 7 Spec, TP is then still available for the subject to move into, resulting into OSV order<br />

that is not available otherwise. Notice that the subject movement is optional because the<br />

EPP-like requirement may be satisfied by the A-bar moved argument but the subject might<br />

still have an independent reason to move (for example, for scope).<br />

7 I have not been able to pinpoint the exact position <strong>of</strong> the contrastive element: it is plausible that a<br />

contrastive element is adjoined to TP or that there is a syntactic position between TP and CP that can be used<br />

as a landing site for contrastive elements.<br />

137


With this contrast in place, we can test Condition C. <strong>The</strong> following examples correspond<br />

to the left-most element being in an A-position, i.e., the intonation is not contrastive<br />

and the OSV order is excluded. All degraded sentences get improved if the linearly first<br />

element gets contrastively stressed, i.e., if it occupies, as I argue, an A-bar movement position:<br />

(15) a. Noví Petrovi známí ho představili řediteli.<br />

new Petr’s-i friends.Nom him.Acc-i introduced director.Dat<br />

b. *Jeho představili noví Petrovi známí řediteli.<br />

him.Acc-i introduced new Petr’s-i friends.Nom director.Dat<br />

‘Petr’s new friends introduced him to the director.’<br />

<strong>The</strong> relevance <strong>of</strong> the example in (15) is supported by examples with long distance movement.<br />

Long distance movement in Czech is always contrastively stressed, i.e., it always targets<br />

an A-bar position. Unsurprisingly, in such a configuration, Condition C is not violated<br />

because the moved element may reconstruct.<br />

(16) JEHO, chceme, aby noví Petrovi známí představili řediteli.<br />

him.Acc.TOP-i want-we that new Petr’s-i freinds.Nom introduced director.Dat<br />

‘We want Petr’s new friends to introduce HIM to the director.’<br />

To make the argument sound I need to show that reconstruction from an A-bar position<br />

is in fact obligatory. An optional reconstruction would be compatible with the view that<br />

A-movement can, under certain circumstances, reconstruct as well. As we can see in the<br />

next example, this is correct. If ‘Petr’s book’ had the option to not reconstruct, this option<br />

could be a strategy to avoid Condition C violation. Such a strategy is not available, though.<br />

(17) *PETROvu knihu ho Marie prosila spálit.<br />

Petr’s-i book,Acc him.Acc-i Marie.Nom to-burn<br />

‘Marie begged Peter to burn his book.’<br />

We have seen that Czech is sensitive to a Condition C violation and we can now approach<br />

testing G-movement. Since pronouns do not undergo G-movement, we must look at an<br />

opposite relation, i.e., cases where an R-epxression crosses a coindexed pronoun. If in the<br />

original structure, coindexation <strong>of</strong> the pronoun and the R-expression causes a Condition<br />

C violation, we predict that G-movement <strong>of</strong> the R-expression might save the Condition C<br />

violation in case it is A-movement. In contrast, if G-movement is A-bar movement we do<br />

not expect to find any improvement with respect to Condition C.<br />

As we can see in the examples in (18), G-movement can indeed save a Condition C<br />

violation. Thus, we can conclude that, with respect to Conditon C, G-movement behaves<br />

as A-movement.<br />

(18) a. *Marie a on i viděli Petrovi i přátele.<br />

Marie.Nom and he saw Petr’s friends.Acc<br />

‘*Marie and he i saw Petr’s i friends.’<br />

b. Petrovi přátele viděla Marie a on i .<br />

138


Petr’s friends.Acc saw Marie.Nom and he<br />

‘*Marie and he i saw Petr’s i friends.’<br />

A.3 <strong>The</strong> Weak Cross-Over Effect<br />

Finally, let’s look at the Weak Cross-Over effect (WCO), defined in (19).<br />

(19) Weak Cross-Over:<br />

A pronoun can only be bound from an argument position.<br />

As can be seen in (20), no WCO violation arises in case <strong>of</strong> G-movement <strong>of</strong> ‘every girl’.<br />

<strong>The</strong> example in (21) is here as a control. Long-distance movement leads to a WCO violation.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contrast shown in (20) and (21) supports the argument that G-movement is<br />

A-movement because it creates new binding relations.<br />

(20) a. *Její pes miluje každou holčičku.<br />

her-i dog.Nom loves every girl.Acc-i<br />

b. Každou holčičku miluje její pes.<br />

every girl.Acc-i loves her-i dog<br />

‘Every girl is loved by her dog.’<br />

(21) *KAŽdou holčičku, chci, aby miloval její pes.<br />

every girl.Acc.TOP-i want-I that loved her-i dog<br />

‘I want every girl to be loved by her dog.’<br />

A.4 A note on base generation<br />

So far I have been assuming that the linear partition between given and new elements is<br />

achieved via movement. However, it has been suggested in the literature that elements on<br />

the left periphery that do not have A-bar properties are base generated in their surface position.<br />

This argument has been made in detail for Romance left clitic dislocation structures<br />

(Cinque 1990; Iatridou 1995; Barbosa 1995). Even though these structures show sensitivity<br />

to syntactic islands, i.e., they appear to undergo movement, the above cited authors argue<br />

that the island sensitivity is a result <strong>of</strong> the presence <strong>of</strong> a binding chain that is either entirely<br />

independent <strong>of</strong> movement, or arises from a short movement within the left periphery. One<br />

could argue that Czech G-movement is just another instance <strong>of</strong> base generation (notice<br />

that the left dislocated elements in clitic left dislocation constructions are given as well)<br />

and that the various word orders are base generated as they are. Another line <strong>of</strong> such an<br />

argument has been made in connection with scrambling by Haider (1988); Bayer and Kornfilt<br />

(1994); Kiss (1994); Neeleman (1994); Neeleman and Reinhart (1998), among others.<br />

In this section, I present two objections to a base-generation approach. <strong>The</strong> first objection<br />

is that the base generation hypothesis does not make clear predictions about the final<br />

word order and it would have to be combined with another system that would determine<br />

the final word order. We have seen in chapter 2 and 3 quite a few examples that suggest a<br />

139


derivational nature <strong>of</strong> the reorderings found in Czech. Furthermore, it is not clear how to<br />

model the relation between head movement and the locality restriction on G-movement in<br />

a base generation system. I take the previous discussion to have made this point sufficiently.<br />

Another point is that Czech has, aside from G-movement, structures that are at least<br />

superficially similar to clitic left dislocation structures in Romance and Greek.<br />

(22) a. Whom did Mary see drunk?<br />

b. Petra (*ho) viděla<br />

Petr.Acc him.Acc saw<br />

‘Marie saw Petr i drunk i .<br />

Marie<br />

Marie.Nom<br />

opilého.<br />

drunk.Acc<br />

(23) Ten Petr, Marie *(ho) viděla opilého.<br />

the Petr.Nom Marie him.Acc saw drunk.Acc<br />

‘As to the Petr i , Marie saw him i drunk i .’<br />

As we can see in (22), in the case <strong>of</strong> G-movement, the given DP Petra is accusative and<br />

there is no occurrence <strong>of</strong> a clitic. In contrast, the same argument appears in (23) in Nominative<br />

case (default case). Accusative case is assigned to a clitic. <strong>The</strong> clitic is obligatory<br />

in this structure. 8,9 Another difference between G-movement and clitic left dislocation in<br />

Czech can be found in embedded contexts. While structures with G-movement can be<br />

freely embedded, as seen in (24), clitic left dislocation is possible only in a matrix environment,<br />

(25).<br />

(24) Maminka říkala, že Petra (*ho) viděla Marie opilého.<br />

mother.Nom said that Petr.Acc him.Acc saw Marie.Nom drunk.Acc<br />

‘My mother said that Marie saw Petr i drunk i .<br />

(25) a. *Maminka říkala, že ten Petr, Marie *(ho) viděla opilého.<br />

mother.Nom said that the Petr.Nom Marie him.Acc saw drunk.Acc<br />

b. *Maminka říkala, ten Petr, že Marie *(ho) viděla opilého.<br />

mother.Nom said the Petr.Nom that Marie him.Acc saw drunk.Acc<br />

c. *Ten Petr, maminka říkala, že Marie *(ho) viděla opilého.<br />

the Petr.Nom mother.Nom said that Marie him.Acc saw drunk.Acc<br />

‘As to the Petr i , my mother said that Marie saw him i drunk i .’<br />

I suggest that the Case differences and the status <strong>of</strong> a clitic, combined with the restrictions<br />

on the embedding <strong>of</strong> clitic left dislocation structures, support the hypothesis that<br />

G-movement is indeed movement. As we have seen, Czech has other syntactic strategies<br />

that are more similar to Romance or Greek clitic left dislocation but G-movement is not<br />

one <strong>of</strong> those.<br />

8 More details on this structure and other left dislocation strategies in Czech can be found in Sturgeon<br />

2006.<br />

9 It has been argued that clitic left dislocation does not always require a clitic (if the left-dislocated element<br />

is the subject or an adjunct) (Cinque, 1990). I control for this possibility by dislocating only objects.<br />

140


A.5 Summary<br />

To conclude, we have seen that G-movement can be characterized as A-movement in the<br />

sense that the position to which element α G-moves functions as a new binding position.<br />

To support the argument, I have provided examples showing interactions between<br />

G-movement and Condition A, Condition C and Weak Cross-Over effect. In the final<br />

section, I have briefly addressed the question whether the reordering I have attributed to<br />

G-movement might be in fact base generated.<br />

141


Bibliography<br />

Aboh, Enoch Oladé. 2004. <strong>The</strong> morphosyntax <strong>of</strong> complement-head sequences: clause<br />

structure and word order patterns in Kwa. New York: Oxford University Press.<br />

Adamec, Přemysl. 1962. K úloze sémantiky ve slovosledu [On the role <strong>of</strong> semantics in<br />

word order]. AUC Philologica, Slavica Pragensia IV:297–300.<br />

Adger, David. 2003. Core <strong>Syntax</strong>: A Minimalist Approach. Oxford University Press.<br />

Arregui-Urbina, Karlos. 2002. Focus on Basque movements. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Bailyn, John Frederick. 2001. On scrambling: A reply to Bošković and Takahashi. Linguistic<br />

Inquiry 32:635–658.<br />

Bailyn, John Frederick. 2003. Does Russian scrambling exist? In Word order and scrambling,<br />

ed. Simin Kirimi. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers.<br />

Bailyn, John Frederick. 2004. Generalized inversion. Natural Language and Linguistic<br />

<strong>The</strong>ory 22:1–49.<br />

Baker, Mark C. 2003. Agreement, dislocation and partial configurationality. In Formal<br />

approaches to function, ed. A. Carnie, H. Harley, and M. Willie, 107–134. Amsterdam:<br />

John Benjamins.<br />

Bale, Alan C. To appear. Quantifiers and verb phrases: An exploration <strong>of</strong> propositional<br />

complexity. Natural language and linguistic theory .<br />

Barbosa, Maria do Pilar Pereira. 1995. Null subjects. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Bayer, Josef, and Jaklin Kornfilt. 1994. Against scrambling as an instance <strong>of</strong> Move-alpha.<br />

In Studies on scrambling, ed. Norbert Corver and Henk van Riemsdjijk, 17–60. Berlin,<br />

New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Beck, Sigrid, and Uli Sauerland. 2000. Cumulation is needed: A reply to Winter (2000).<br />

Natural language semantics 8:349–371.<br />

Belletti, Adriana, ed. 2004. Structures and beyond. <strong>The</strong> cartography <strong>of</strong> syntactic structures,<br />

volume 3. Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Benešová, Eva. 1968. O sémantickém charakteru českého slovosledu [On the semantic<br />

character <strong>of</strong> Czech word order]. Slovo a slovesnost 29:34–41.<br />

142


Biskup, Petr. In preparation. <strong>The</strong> phase model and adverbials. Doctoral Dissertation,<br />

Universität Leipzig.<br />

Bonet, Eulàlia. 1990. Subjects in Catalan. In Papers on wh-movement. MIT Working<br />

Papers in Linguistics, ed. Lisa L.S. Cheng and Hamida Demirdash, 1–26. Cambridge,<br />

MA: MITWPL.<br />

Bošković, Željko. 2001. On the Nature <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Syntax</strong>-Phonology Interface. Cliticization<br />

and Related Phenomena. Amsterdam: Elsevier.<br />

Bošković, Željko. 2005. Left branching extraction, structure <strong>of</strong> NP, and scrambling. In<br />

<strong>The</strong> free word order phenomenon: Its syntactic sources and diversity, ed. J. Sabel and<br />

M. Saito. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Bošković, Željko, and Daiko Takahashi. 1998. Scrambling and last resort. Linguistic<br />

Inquiry 29:347–366.<br />

Bresnan, Joan. 1972. On sentence stress and syntactic transformations. In Contributions to<br />

Generative Phonology, ed. Michael Brame, 73–107. Oxford <strong>of</strong> Texas Press.<br />

Büring, Daniel. 2006. Focus projection and default prominence. In <strong>The</strong> architecture <strong>of</strong><br />

focus, ed. Valéria Molnár and Susanne Winkler, 321–346. Berlin–New York: Mouton<br />

De Gruyter.<br />

Büring, Daniel, and Katharina Hartmann. 2001. <strong>The</strong> syntax and semantics <strong>of</strong> focussensitive<br />

particles in German. Natural language and linguistic theory 19:229–281.<br />

Cardinaletti, Anna, and Michal Starke. 1999. <strong>The</strong> typology <strong>of</strong> structural deficiency: A case<br />

study <strong>of</strong> the three classes <strong>of</strong> pronouns. In Clitics in languages <strong>of</strong> Europe, ed. Henk C. van<br />

Riemsdijk, George Bosong, and Bernard Comrie, 145–234. Berlin; New York: Mouton<br />

de Gruyter.<br />

Chafe, Wallace R. 1976. <strong>Givenness</strong>, contrastiveness, definiteness, subjects and topics. In<br />

Subjects and topics, 25–56. New York: Academic Press.<br />

Choi, Hye-Won. 1999. Optimizing structure in context. Stanford, California: CSLI Publications.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 1986. Barriers. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 1993. A minimalist program for linguistic theory. In <strong>The</strong> view from<br />

building 20: Essays in linguistics in honor <strong>of</strong> Sylvain Bromberger, ed. Kenneth Hale and<br />

Samuel Jay Kayser. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 1995. <strong>The</strong> Minimalist Program. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 2000. Minimalist inquiries: <strong>The</strong> framework. In Step by Step, ed. R. Martin,<br />

D. Michaels, and J. Urigereka. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

143


Chomsky, Noam. 2001. Derivation by phase. In Ken Hale: A life in language, 1–52.<br />

Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 2004a. Beyond explanatory adequacy. In Structures and Beyond, ed.<br />

A. Belletti. New York: Oxford University Press.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 2004b. Class lectures; fall 2004.<br />

Chomsky, Noam. 2005. On phases. MIT ms.<br />

Cinque, Guglielmo. 1990. Type <strong>of</strong> A’-dependencies. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.<br />

Cinque, Guglielmo. 1993. A null theory <strong>of</strong> phrasal and compound stress. Linguistic inquiry<br />

24:239–267.<br />

Cinque, Guglielmo, ed. 2002. Functional structure in DP and IP. <strong>The</strong> cartography <strong>of</strong><br />

syntactic structures, volume 1. Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Citko, Barbara. 2006. Interaction between Across-the-Board wh-movement and leftbranching<br />

extraction. <strong>Syntax</strong> 9:225–247.<br />

Collins, Chris. 2002. Eliminating labels. In Derivation and explanation in the Minimalist<br />

Program, ed. S.D. Epstein and T.D. Seely. Blackwell.<br />

Corver, Norbert, and Henk van Riemsdijk, ed. 1994. Studies on scrambling. Movement and<br />

non-movement approaches to free word-order phenomena. Berlin, New York: Mouton<br />

de Gruyter.<br />

Daneš, František. 1954. Příspěvek k rozboru významové výstavby výpovědi [a contribution<br />

to the analysis <strong>of</strong> the semantic structure <strong>of</strong> the utterance]. Studie a práce lingvistické<br />

I:263–274.<br />

Daneš, František. 1957. Intonace a věta ve spisovné češtině [Intonation and sentence in<br />

Standard Czech]. Praha: Nakladatelství Československé akademie věd.<br />

Daneš, František. 1974. Functional sentence perspective and the organisation <strong>of</strong> the text.<br />

In Papers on functional sentence perspective, ed. František Daneš, 106–128. Prague:<br />

Academia.<br />

Diesing, Molly. 1990. Verb movement and the subject position in Yiddish. Natural Language<br />

and Linguistic <strong>The</strong>ory 8:41–79.<br />

Diesing, Molly. 1992. Indefinites. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.<br />

den Dikken, Marcel. To Appear. Phase extension. <strong>The</strong>oretical Linguistics .<br />

Dokulil, Miloš, and František Daneš. 1958. K tzv. významové a mluvnické stavbě<br />

věty [On the so called semantics and grammatical structure <strong>of</strong> the sentence]. In O<br />

vědeckém poznání soudobých jazyků, ed. Antonín Dostál, 231–246. Praha: Nakladatelství<br />

Československé akademie věd.<br />

144


Dotlačil, Jakub. 2004. <strong>The</strong> syntax <strong>of</strong> infinitives in Czech. Master <strong>The</strong>sis, Universitetet i<br />

Tromsø.<br />

Downing, Laura J., Luzt Marten, and Sabine Zerbian, ed. 2006. Papers in Bantu grammar<br />

and description. ZAS papers in linguistics 43.<br />

Elbourne, Paul D. 2005. Situations and Individuals. MIT Press.<br />

Enç, Mürvet. 1991. <strong>The</strong> semantics <strong>of</strong> specificity. Linguistic inquiry 22:1–25.<br />

Erteschik-Shir, Nomi. 1997. <strong>The</strong> dynamics <strong>of</strong> focus structure. CMambridge: Cambridge<br />

University Press.<br />

Farkas, Donka F. 2002. Specificity distinctions. Journal <strong>of</strong> Semantics 19:213–243.<br />

Firbas, Jan. 1964. On defining the theme in functional sentence perspective. Travaux<br />

linguistiques de Prague 1:267–280.<br />

Firbas, Jan. 1992. Functional sentence perspective in written and spoken communication.<br />

Cambridge, New York: Cambridge University Press.<br />

Fox, Danny. 1995. Economy and scope. Natural language semantics 3:283–341.<br />

Fox, Danny. 1999. Reconstruction, binding theory, and the interpretation <strong>of</strong> chains. Linguistic<br />

Inquiry 30:157–196.<br />

Fox, Danny. 2000. Economy and semantic interpretation. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.<br />

Fox, Danny, and David Pesetsky. 2005. Cyclic linearization <strong>of</strong> syntactic structure. <strong>The</strong>oretical<br />

Linguistics 31:1–45.<br />

Franks, Steven, and Tracy Holloway King. 2000. A handbook <strong>of</strong> Slavic clitics. New York,<br />

Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Gebauer, Jan. 1900. Příruční mluvnice jazyka českého pro učitele a studium soukromé<br />

[Practical grammmar <strong>of</strong> Czech for teachers and private study]. Praha: Nákladem F.<br />

Tempského.<br />

van Geenhoven, Veerle. 1998. Semantic incorporation and indefinite descriptions: Semantic<br />

and syntactic aspects <strong>of</strong> noun incorporation in West Greenlandic. Stanford: CSLI<br />

Publications.<br />

Grewendorf, Günther, and Wolfgang Sternfeld, ed. 1990. Scrambling and barriers. Amsterdam,<br />

Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publisher.<br />

Haider, Hubert. 1988. θ-tracking system – Evidence from German. In Configurationality,<br />

ed. L. Maracz and P. Muysken, 185–206. Dordrecht: Foris.<br />

Hajičová, Eva. 1973. Negation and topic vs. comment. Philologica Pragensia 16:81–93.<br />

145


Hajičová, Eva. 1974. Negace a presupozice ve významové stavbě věty [Negation and presupposition<br />

in the meaning structure <strong>of</strong> a sentence]. Prague: Academia.<br />

Hajičová, Eva, Barbara H. Partee, and Petr Sgall. 1998. Topic-focus articulation, tripartite<br />

structures, and semantic content. Dordrecht–Boston–London: Kluwer Academic<br />

Publishers.<br />

Hale, Ken, and Samuel Jay Keyser. 2002. Prelogomenon to a theory <strong>of</strong> argument structure.<br />

Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.<br />

Halliday, Michael A. K. 1967. Notes on transitivity and theme in English,Part II. Journal<br />

<strong>of</strong> Linguistics 3:199–244.<br />

Hausenblas, Karel. 1964. On characterization and classification <strong>of</strong> discourse. Travaux<br />

Linguistiques de Prague 1:67–84.<br />

Heck, Fabian, and Gereon Müller. 2006. Extremely local optimization. [Ms., Universität<br />

Leipzig].<br />

Heim, Irene. 1991. Artikel und Definitheit. In Semantik: Ein internationales Handbuch<br />

der zeitgenössischen Forschung, 487–535. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Heim, Irene, and Angelika Kratzer. 1998. Semantics in generative grammar. Oxford:<br />

Blackwell.<br />

Heycock, Caroline, and Anthony Kroch. 1993. Verb movement and coordination in a dynamic<br />

theory <strong>of</strong> licensing. Groninger Arbeiten zur Germanistischen Linguistik 36:75–<br />

102.<br />

Hlavsa, Zdeněk. 1975. Denotace objektu a její prostředky v současné češtině [Denotation<br />

<strong>of</strong> an object and its means in current Czech]. Prague: Academia.<br />

Holmberg, Anders. 1986. Word order and syntactic features. Doctoral Dissertation, University<br />

<strong>of</strong> Stockholm.<br />

Horn, Laurence. 1972. On the semantic propertis <strong>of</strong> the logical operators in English. Doctoral<br />

Dissertation, UCLA.<br />

van der Hulst, Harry, ed. 1999. Word prosodic systems in the languages <strong>of</strong> Europe. Berlin,<br />

New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Iatridou, Sabine. 1995. Clitics and island effects. In Penn working papers in linguistics,<br />

ed. Roumyana Izvorski and Victoria Tredinnick, volume 2, 11–30. University <strong>of</strong> Pennsylvania.<br />

Iatridou, Sabine. 2002. What I’ve learned about reconstruction in A-chains [MIT ms.].<br />

Johnson, Kyle. 2002. Restoring exotic coordinations to normalcy. Linguistic inquiry 33:97–<br />

156.<br />

146


Junghanns, Uwe. 1999. Generative Beschreibung periphrasticher Konstruktionen des<br />

Tschechischen. In Linguistische Beiträge zur Slavistik aus Deutschland and Österreich.<br />

VII. JungslavistInnen-Treffen, Tübingen / Blaubeuren 1998., ed. T. Anstatt, R. Meyer,<br />

and E. Seitz. München: Saguer.<br />

Junghanns, Uwe, and Gerhild Zybatow. 1997. <strong>Syntax</strong> and information structure <strong>of</strong> Russian<br />

clauses. In Annual workshop on formal approaches to Slavic linguistics. <strong>The</strong> Cornell<br />

meeting 1995 (= Michigan Slavic Materials; 39), ed. E. W. Browne et al. Ann Arbor:<br />

Browne, E.W. et al.<br />

Karimi, Simin, ed. 2003. Word order and scrambling. Blackwell Publishing.<br />

Kayne, Richard. 1994. <strong>The</strong> antisymmetry <strong>of</strong> syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Kiss, Katalin É. 1994. Scrambling as the base-generation <strong>of</strong> random complement order.<br />

In Studies on scrambling, ed. Norbert Corver and Henk van Riemsdjijk, 61–100. Berlin,<br />

New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Ko, Heejeong. 2007. Asymmetries in scrambling and cyclic linearization. Linguistic Inquiry<br />

38:49–83.<br />

Krifka, Manfred. 2001. Non-novel indefinites in adverbial quantification. In Logical perspectives<br />

on language and information, ed. Cleo Condoravdi and Gerard Renardel der<br />

Lavalette, 1–40. Stanford: CSLI Press.<br />

Krifka, Manfred. 2006a. Association with focus phrases. In <strong>The</strong> architecture <strong>of</strong> focus, ed.<br />

Valéria Molnár and Susanne Winkler, 105–136. Berlin–New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Krifka, Manfred. 2006b. Can focus accenting be eliminated in favor <strong>of</strong> deaccenting Given<br />

constituents. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong> the Ninth Symposium on logic and language, Hungary,<br />

August 23–26.<br />

Kruijff-Korbayová, Ivana, and Mark Steedman. 2003. Discourse and information structure.<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Logic, Language and Information 12:249–259.<br />

Kusumoto, Kiyomi. 2005. On the quantification over times in natural language. Natural<br />

language semantics 13:317–357.<br />

Kučerová, <strong>Ivona</strong>. 2005. <strong>The</strong> T-Extension condition. In Procedings <strong>of</strong> the 24th West Coast<br />

Conference on Formal Linguistics, ed. John Alderete et al., 227–235. Somerville, MA:<br />

Cascadilla Proceedings Project.<br />

Ladd, D. Robert. 1980. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> intonational meaning. Cambridge: Cambridge<br />

University Press.<br />

Ladd, D. Robert. 1996. Intonational Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.<br />

Larson, Richard. 1988. On the double object construction. Linguistic Inquiry 19:335–391.<br />

147


Lasnik, Howard. 1999. Chains <strong>of</strong> arguments. In Working Minimalism, ed. David Epstein<br />

and Norbert Hornstein. Cambridge: MIT Press.<br />

Lasnik, Howard, and Mamoru Saito. 1992. Move α. Conditions on its application and<br />

output. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Lavine, James, and Robert Freidin. 2002. <strong>The</strong> subject <strong>of</strong> defective T(ense) in Slavic. Journal<br />

<strong>of</strong> Slavic linguistics 10:251–287.<br />

Lebeaux, David. 1988. Language acquisition and the form <strong>of</strong> grammar. Doctoral Dissertation,<br />

University <strong>of</strong> Massachusetts at Amherst.<br />

Lebeaux, David. 1998. Where does binding theory apply? Technical report, NEC.<br />

Magri, Giorgio. 2007. A theory <strong>of</strong> individual level predicates based on blind scalar implicatures<br />

[MIT ms.].<br />

Mahajan, Anoop Kumar. 1990. <strong>The</strong> A/A-bar distinction and movement theory. Doctoral<br />

Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Mathesius, Vilém. [1929] 1983. Functional linguistics. In Praguiana: Some basic and wellknown<br />

aspects <strong>of</strong> the Prague Linguistics School, ed. J. Vachek, 121–142. Amsterdam:<br />

John Benjamins.<br />

Mathesius, Vilém. 1931. K dynamické linii české věty [To the dynamic line <strong>of</strong> a Czech<br />

sentence]. Časopis pro moderní filologii 17:71ff.<br />

Mathesius, Vilém. 1937. Mluvní takt a některé problémy příbuzné [Prosodic tact and some<br />

related problems]. Slovo a slovesnost 3:193–199.<br />

Mathesius, Vilém. 1939. O tak zvaném aktuálním členění věty [On the so called<br />

topic/comment articulation <strong>of</strong> the sentence]. Slovo a slovesnost 5:171–174.<br />

Meyer, Roland. 2003. On multiple wh-fronting and wh-clustering in Czech. In Formal<br />

approaches to Slavic linguistics XII: <strong>The</strong> Amherst meeting, ed. W. Browne, E. Kim, and<br />

B. Partee, 393–412. Ann Arbor: Michigan Slavic Publications.<br />

Meyer, Roland. 2004. <strong>Syntax</strong> der Ergänzungsfrage. Empirische Untersuchungen am Russischen,<br />

Polnischen und Tschechischen [syntax <strong>of</strong> wh-questions. Empirical studies in<br />

russian, polish and czech]. München: Verlag Otto Sagner.<br />

Miyagawa, Shigeru. 1997. Against optional scrambling. Linguistic Inquiry 28:1–25.<br />

Neeleman, Ad. 1994. Scrambling as a D-structure phenomenon. In Studies on scrambling,<br />

ed. Norbert Corver and Henk van Riemsdjijk, 387–429. Berlin, New York: Mouton de<br />

Gruyter.<br />

Neeleman, Ad, and Hans van de Koot. 2006. <strong>The</strong> nature <strong>of</strong> discourse templates. [UCL<br />

ms.].<br />

148


Neeleman, Ad, and Tanya Reinhart. 1998. Scrambling and the PF interface. In <strong>The</strong> projection<br />

<strong>of</strong> arguments, ed. M. Butt and W. Geuder, 309–353. CSLI.<br />

Nevins, Andrew, and Pranav Anand. 2003. Some AGREEment matters. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong><br />

WCCFL 22, ed. G. Garding and M. Tsujimura, 370–383. Somerville, Mass.: Cascadilla<br />

Press.<br />

Nissenbaum, Jon. 1998. Movement and derived predicates: Evidence from Parasitic Gaps.<br />

In <strong>The</strong> interpretive tract, ed. Uli Sauerland and Orin Percus, 247–295. Cambridge, MA:<br />

MITWPL.<br />

Nissenbaum, Jonathan W. 2000. Investigations <strong>of</strong> covert phrase movement. Doctoral Dissertation,<br />

MIT.<br />

Novák, Pavel. 1959. O prostředcích aktuálního členění [On the means <strong>of</strong> topic-focus articulation].<br />

AUC Philologica 1:9–15.<br />

Ogihara, Toshiyuki. 1996. Tense, Attitudes, and Scope. Springer.<br />

Palková, Zdena. 1994. Fonetika a fonologie češtiny [Phonetics and phonology <strong>of</strong> Czech].<br />

Praha: Karolinum.<br />

Partee, Barbara H., and Mats Rooth. 1983. Generalized conjunction and type ambiquity. In<br />

Meaning, use and the interpretation <strong>of</strong> language, ed. Rainer Bäurle, Christoph Schwarze,<br />

and Arnim von Stechow, 361–393. Walter de Gruyter & Co.<br />

Percus, Orin. 2006. Anti-presuppositions. In <strong>The</strong>oretical and empirical studies <strong>of</strong> reference<br />

and anaphora: Toward the establishment <strong>of</strong> generative grammar as an empirical<br />

science, ed. A. Ueyamada, 52–73. Japan Society for the Promotion <strong>of</strong> Science.<br />

Pesetsky, David. 1982. Paths and categories. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Pesetsky, David, and Esther Torrego. 2006. Probes, goals and syntactic categories. In<br />

Proceedings <strong>of</strong> the Seventh Tokyo conference on psycholinguistics, ed. Yukio Otsu, 25–<br />

60. Tokyo: Hituzi Svobo Publishing Company.<br />

Petr, Jan, Miloš Dokulil, Karel Horálek, Jiřina Hůrková, and Miloslava Knappová, ed.<br />

1986. Mluvnice češtiny [Grammar <strong>of</strong> Czech]. Praha: Academia.<br />

Petřík, Stanislav. 1938. O hudební stránce stědočeské věty [About musical properties <strong>of</strong> a<br />

Central Bohemian sentence]. Praha: Filos<strong>of</strong>ická fakulta University Karlovy.<br />

Postal, Paul. 1966. On so-called “pronouns” in English. In Report on the Seventeenth Annual<br />

Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and Language Studies, 177–206. Washington,<br />

DC: Georgetown University Press.<br />

Pylkkänen, Liina. 2002. Introducing arguments. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT, Cambridge,<br />

MA.<br />

Reinhart, Tanya. 1995. Focus – the PF interface [University <strong>of</strong> Utrecht, ms.].<br />

149


Reinhart, Tanya. 1997. Quantifier scope: How labor is divided between QR and choice<br />

functions. Linguistics and philosophy 20:335–397.<br />

Reinhart, Tanya. 2006. Interface strategies. Optimal and costly computations. Cambridge,<br />

MA: MIT Press.<br />

Rezac, Milan. 2005. <strong>The</strong> syntax <strong>of</strong> clitic climbing in Czech. In Clitic and affix combinations:<br />

<strong>The</strong>oretical perspectives, ed. Lorie Heggie and Francisco Ordó nez. John<br />

Benjamins Publishing Company.<br />

Richards, Norvin. 1997. What moves where when and in which language? Doctoral<br />

Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Rizzi, Luigi. 1990. Relativized minimality. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.<br />

Rizzi, Luigi. 1997. <strong>The</strong> fine structure <strong>of</strong> the left periphery. In Elements <strong>of</strong> grammar:<br />

Handbook <strong>of</strong> generative syntax, ed. Liliane Haegeman, 281–337. Dordrecht: Kluwer.<br />

Rizzi, Luigi, ed. 2004. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> CP and IP. <strong>The</strong> cartography <strong>of</strong> syntactic structures,<br />

volume 2. Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Romportl, Milan. 1973. Základy fonetiky [Basics <strong>of</strong> phonetics]. Praha.<br />

Ross, J. R. 1967. Constraints on variables in syntax. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT, Cambridge,<br />

MA.<br />

Sabel, Joachim, and Mamoru Saito, ed. 2005. <strong>The</strong> free word order phenomenon: its syntactic<br />

sources and diversity. Berlin, New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Saito, Mamoru. 1989. Scrambling as semantically vacuous A-movement. In Alternative<br />

conceptions <strong>of</strong> phrase structure, ed. Mark Baltin and Anthony Kroch, 182–200. Chicago:<br />

University <strong>of</strong> Chicago Press.<br />

Saito, Mamoru. 1992. Long distance scrambling in Japanese. Journal <strong>of</strong> East Asian linguistics<br />

1:69–119.<br />

Sauerland, Uli. 1999. Erasibility and interpretation. <strong>Syntax</strong> 2:161–188.<br />

Sauerland, Uli. 2003. A new semantics for number. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong> SALT 13, ed.<br />

R. Young and Y. Zhou. Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y: CLC Publications.<br />

Sauerland, Uli. 2005. Don’t interpret focus: Why a presuppositional account <strong>of</strong> focus fails,<br />

and how a presuppositional account <strong>of</strong> givenness works. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong> Sinn und<br />

Bedeutung 9, 370–384. University <strong>of</strong> Nijmegen, Netherlands.<br />

Schlenker, Philippe. 2006. ‘maximize Presupposition’ and Gricean reasoning [UCLA &<br />

Institut Jean-Nicod ms.].<br />

Schwarzschild, Roger. 1999. GIVENness, AvoidF and other constraints on the placement<br />

<strong>of</strong> accent. Natural language semantics 7:141–177.<br />

150


Selkirk, Elizabeth O. 1995. Sentence prosody: Intonation, stress, and phrasing. In <strong>The</strong><br />

handbook <strong>of</strong> phonology, ed. J.A.Goldsmith, 550–569. London: Blackwell.<br />

Sgall, Petr. 1967. Functional sentence perspective in a generative description. Prague<br />

Studies in Mathematical Linguistics 2:203–225.<br />

Sgall, Petr, Eva Hajičová, and Eva Buráňová. 1980. Aktuální členění věty v češtině<br />

[Topic/focus articulation <strong>of</strong> the Czech sentences]. Praha: Academia.<br />

Sgall, Petr, Eva Hajičová, and Jarmila Panevová. 1986. <strong>The</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> the sentence in<br />

its semantic and pragmatic aspects. Dordrecht, Boston, Lancaster, Tokyo: D. Reidel<br />

Publishing Company.<br />

Sigurðsson, Halldór Ármann. 2004. Agree and agreement: Evidence from Germanic. Focus<br />

on Germanic Typology, Studia Typologica 6:61–103.<br />

Skaličková, Alena. 1956. K otázce větného přízvuku v češtině [To the question <strong>of</strong> sentential<br />

stress in Czech]. AUC Philologica 55–86.<br />

Stalnaker, Robert. 1973. Presuppositions. Journal <strong>of</strong> Philosophical Logic 2:447–457.<br />

Stalnaker, Robert. 1974. Pragmatic presupposition. In Semantics and philosophy, ed.<br />

Milton Munitz and Peter Unger, 197–213. New York: New-York University Press.<br />

Stalnaker, Robert C. 2002. Common ground. Linguistics & Philosophy 25:701–721.<br />

Sturgeon, Anne. 2006. <strong>The</strong> syntax and pragmatics <strong>of</strong> contrastive topic in Czech. Doctoral<br />

Dissertation, UC Santa Cruz.<br />

Svenonius, Peter. 1994. C-selection as feature-checking. Studia linguistica 48:133–155.<br />

Svoboda, Aleš. 1984. České slovosledné pozice z pohledu aktuálního členění [Czech word<br />

order positions from the point <strong>of</strong> view <strong>of</strong> topic focus articulation]. Slovo a slovesnost<br />

45:22–34, 88–103.<br />

Szendrői, Kriszta. 2003. A stress-based approach to the syntax <strong>of</strong> Hungarian focus. <strong>The</strong><br />

linguistic review 20:37–78.<br />

Tateishi, Koichi. 1994. <strong>The</strong> syntax <strong>of</strong> ‘subjects’. Stanford: CSLI.<br />

Trávníček, František. 1937. Základy československého slovosledu [Basics <strong>of</strong> Czechoslovak<br />

word order]. Slovo a slovesnost 3:78–86.<br />

Trávníček, František. 1939. Slovosled při důrazu [Word order under emphasis]. Slovo a<br />

slovesnost 5:131–144.<br />

Truckenbrodt, Hubert. 1995. Phonological phrases: <strong>The</strong>ir relation to syntax, focus, and<br />

prominence. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Vallduví, Enric. 1990. <strong>The</strong> intonation component. Doctoral Dissertation, University <strong>of</strong><br />

Pennsylvania.<br />

151


Vallduví, Enric. 1992. <strong>The</strong> informational component. New York, London: Garland Publishing,<br />

Inc.<br />

Veselovská, Ludmila. 1995. Phrasal Movement and X-Morphology: Word Order Parallels<br />

in Czech and English Nominal and Verbal Projections. Doctoral Dissertation, Palacký<br />

University, Olomouc.<br />

Veselovská, Ludmila. 1998. Possessive movement in the Czech nominal phrase. Journal<br />

<strong>of</strong> Slavic linguistics 6:255–300.<br />

Veselovská, Ludmila. 2004. <strong>The</strong> extended verbal projection in Czech: Three variants <strong>of</strong><br />

the verb ‘be’. Presented at FDSL 5. University <strong>of</strong> Potsdam, Germany.<br />

Veselovská, Ludmila, and Petr Karlík. 2004. Analytic passives in Czech. Zeitschrift für<br />

Slavistik 2:163–243.<br />

Vos, Riet, and Ludmila Veselovská. 1999. Clitic questionnaire. In Clitics in the languages<br />

<strong>of</strong> Europe, ed. Henk van Riemsdijk, 891–1009. Berlin, New York: Mouton de Gruyter.<br />

Šmilauer, Vladimír. 1960. Pořádek slov [Word order]. In O češtině pro Čechy, ed.<br />

František Daneš et al., 247–270. Praha: Novinářský studijní ústav.<br />

Wagner, Michael. 2005. Prosody and recursion. Doctoral Dissertation, MIT.<br />

Wagner, Michael. To appear. NPI-licensing and focus movement. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong> SALT<br />

XV. Cornell University., ed. Effi Georgala and Jonathan Howell. Cornell University.<br />

Wagner, Michael. To appear a. Association by movement: Evidence from NPI-licensing.<br />

Natural language semantics .<br />

Wagner, Michael. To appear b. <strong>Givenness</strong> and locality. In Proceedings <strong>of</strong> SALT XVI. Ithaca,<br />

NY: CLC Publications.<br />

Webelhuth, Gert. 1989. Syntactic saturation phenomena and the modern Germanic languages.<br />

Doctoral Dissertation, University <strong>of</strong> Massachusetts, Amherst.<br />

Williams, Edwin. 1984. <strong>The</strong>re-insertion. Linguistic Inquiry 15:131–153.<br />

Williams, Edwin. 1997. Blocking and anaphora. Linguistic Inquiry 28:577–628.<br />

Wurmbrand, Susi. 2006. Tense topics: <strong>The</strong> future <strong>of</strong> infinitives [Colloquium talk, MIT,<br />

December 2006].<br />

Wurmbrand, Susi. To appear. Infinitives are tenseless. Proceedings <strong>of</strong> the 30th Annual<br />

Penn linguistics colloquium. Penn Working Papers in Linguistics 13.<br />

Zerbian, Sabine. 2006. Expression <strong>of</strong> information structure in the Bantu language Northern<br />

Sotho. ZAS Papers in Linguistics 45.<br />

152


Zikánová, Šárka. 2006. Slovosled ve starší češtině (1500-1620): Postavení syntetického<br />

přísudku ve větě hlavní [Word order in older Czech (1500-1620): <strong>The</strong> position <strong>of</strong> the<br />

synthetic predicate in matrix clauses]. Doctoral Dissertation, Charles University, Prague.<br />

Zubizarreta, Maria Luisa. 1998. Prosody, focus, and word order. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT<br />

Press.<br />

153

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!